Invacare Wheelchair Arrow User Manual

Service Manual

STORM SERIES^®

WHEELCHAIRS

(RWD/MWD/FWD)

Arrow

™

Torque SP

™

Ranger X

DEALER: KEEP THIS MANUALꢀ THE PROCEDURES

IN THIS MANUAL MUST BE PERFORMED BY AN

AUTHORIZED DEALER ONLY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

NOTE: The information in this owner's manual applies to the STORM ARROW, ** STORM TORQUE, STORM

X, JUNIOR MODELS and the RECLINER Wheelchairs except where specified)

NOTE: Procedures 1- 14 apply to rear wheel drive, mid wheel drive and front wheel drive wheelchairs EXCEPT

where specified)

SPECIALNOTES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ2

SPECIFICATIONS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ6

PROCEDURE1-GENERALGUIDELINES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8

REPAIRORSERVICEINFORMATION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8

OPERATINGINFORMATION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ8

WARNING/CAUTIONLABELLOCATION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ9

PROCEDURE2-TROUBLESHOOTING ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 11

FIELDLOADTEST ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 11

USINGHYDROMETERTOCHECKBATTERYCELLS(LEADACID) ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 11

MOTORTESTING ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 12

MOTORBRUSHINSPECTION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 13

ELECTRO-MECHANICALPARKINGBRAKETESTING ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 13

PROCEDURE3-HARDWARETORQUESPECIFICATIONS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 14

STANDARDSEATFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 14

CAPTAINSVANSEAT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 15

ADJUSTABLESEATFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 15

REARWHEELDRIVEBASEFRAMEHARDWARETORQUESPECIFICATIONS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 16

MID-WHEELDRIVEBASEFRAMEHARDWARETORQUESPECIFICATIONS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 17

FRONTWHEELDRIVEBASEFRAMEHARDWARETORQUESPECIFICATIONS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 18

PROCEDURE4- ARMS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 19

REPLACINGARMRESTPADS-CAPTAINSVANSEAT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 19

REPLACINGCAPTAINSVANSEATARMRESTPLATE ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 19

PROCEDURE5-UPHOLSTERY/POSITIONINGSTRAP ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 20

REPLACINGSEATPOSITIONINGSTRAP-CAPTAINSVANSEATS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 20

REPLACINGBACKUPHOLSTERY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 20

PROCEDURE6-SEATFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 22

PREPARATIONSFORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STANDARDFRAME,ADJUSTABLEFRAMEAND

CAPTAINSVANSEAT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 22

REPLACINGEXACTSAMESIZESTANDARDSEATFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 23

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSTANDARDSEATFRAMESUB-ASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 23

CHANGINGSEATDEPTH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 24

CHANGINGSEATWIDTH(STANDARDANDADJUSTABLESEATFRAME) ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 26

INSTALLING/REMOVINGADJUSTABLESEATFRAMESUBASSEMBLYAND/ORCOMPONENTREPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 27

INSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 29

REPLACING CAPTAINS VAN SEATAND/ORCAPTAINS VAN SEATFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 29

CONVERTINGFROMSTANDARD SEATFRAMETOADJUSTABLE SEATFRAME OR VICE VERSA ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 30

CONVERTINGFROMADJUSTABLE SEATFRAMETOCAPTAINS VAN SEATOR VICE VERSA ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 30

CONVERTINGFROMSTANDARD SEATFRAMETOCAPTAINS VAN SEATOR VICE VERSA ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 31

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATPAN ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 31

MOUNTINGPLATE-SEATANGLEADJUSTMENTANDINSTALLATIONORIENTATION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 32

PROCEDURE7-BASEFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 33

REPLACINGSEATMOUNTINGPLATES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 33

REPLACINGSEATSUPPORTBRACKETS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 33

REPLACINGSEATSUPPORTBRACKETT-NUTS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 34

REPLACINGBATTERYCHARGERBRACKETANDT-NUT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 35

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATSTOPSCREWS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 36

PROCEDURE8-BACKFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 37

REPLACINGCJBACKBRACKETS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 37

CHANGINGBACKHEIGHT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 38

BACKANGLEADJUSTMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 40

** The Storm Torque model wheelchair is available in rear wheel drive ONLY)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Con t in ued)

PROCEDURE9-BATTERIES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 41

INSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERIESINTO/FROMBATTERYBOX(ES) ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 41

CONNECTINGBATTERYCABLES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 42

WHENTO CHARGEBATTERIES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 46

CHARGINGBATTERIES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 46

REPLACINGBATTERIES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 48

INSTALLING/REMOVINGGROUP24BATTERYBOXES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 48

INSTALLING/REMOVINGGROUP22BATTERYBOX ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 49

PROCEDURE10-WIRINGHARNESS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 50

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEWIRINGHARNESS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 50

ADJUSTINGLIMITSWITCH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 52

PROCEDURE11-RETENTIONSTRAP/RETAINER ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 53

REPLACINGBATTERYBOXRETAINER/RETAINERCLIP-GROUP24 BATTERYBASEFRAMES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 53

PROCEDURE12-WHEELS/MOTORS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 54

REPLACINGPNEUMATICTIRES/TUBES-DRIVEWHEELS/CASTERS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 55

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 55

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELHUB ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 56

INSTALLINGWHEELLOCKBRACKETONTOWHEELCHAIR ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 56

REMOVING/INSTALLINGCASTERS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 57

REPLACINGFORKS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 57

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEMOTOR(CONVENTIONALMOTORWITHGEARBOX) ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 57

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEMOTOR(GEARLESSBRUSHLESSMOTOR) ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 59

PROCEDURE13-ELECTRONICS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 61

REPOSITIONINGMKIVJOYSTICK-VANSEATMODELS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 61

REMOVING/INSTALLINGMKIVCONTROLLER ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 61

PROCEDURE14-RECLINER ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 63

POSITIONINGLIMITSWITCH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 63

ADJUSTINGLIMITSWITCH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 63

REPLACINGRECLINERCABLEASSEMBLIES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 64

REPLACING/ADJUSTINGGASCYLINDERS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 65

CHANGINGBACKHEIGHT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 66

CHANGINGSEATDEPTH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 67

CHANGINGSEATWIDTH ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 67

EQUIPMENTOPTIONINSTALLING/REPLACINGADJUSTABLE16TO19-INCHDEEPRECLINERSEATFRAMEONTO

ARROW OR X BASE FRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 68

PROCEDURE15-MWDWHEELCHAIRS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 69

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGROUP24BATTERY BOXSUB-FRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 69

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGROUP22BATTERYBOXTRAY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 69

EQUIPMENTOPTIONCONVERTINGGROUP22BATTERYBOXTRAYTOGROUP24BATTERYBOXSUBFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 70

SHOCKREPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 71

SHOCKSPRINGREPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 73

REPLACINGSTABILIZERFORKASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 74

REPLACINGSTABILIZERWHEELS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 74

REPLACINGSTABILIZERCYLINDERSPRING ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 75

ADJUSTINGWEIGHTDISTRIBUTION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 75

ADJUSTINGSTABILIZERS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 76

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOX ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 77

REPLACINGSUSPENSIONARM ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Con t in ued)

PROCEDURE16-RWDWHEELCHAIRS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 79

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGROUP24BATTERY BOXSUB-FRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 79

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGROUP22BATTERYBOXTRAY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 79

EQUIPMENTOPTION CONVERTINGGROUP22BATTERYBOXTRAYTOGROUP24BATTERYBOXSUBFRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀ 80

SHOCKREPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 81

SHOCKSPRINGREPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 83

RUBBERELEMENTREPLACEMENT-TORQUEANDXBASEFRAMES ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 84

EQUIPMENTOPTIONCONVERTINGTORQUEANDXRUBBERELEMENTSTOSHOCKS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 84

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOX ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 85

ADJUSTINGWEIGHTDISTRIBUTION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 85

REPOSITIONINGMOTOR/GEARBOX ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 86

REPOSITIONINGTHEGEARLESS/BRUSHLESSMOTOR ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 87

REPLACINGSUSPENSIONARMFORWHEELCHAIRSWITHMOTOR/GEARBOXASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 88

REPLACINGTHESUSPENSIONARMFORWHEELCHAIRSWITHGEARLESS/BRUSHLESSMOTOR ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 89

ANTI-TIPPERWHEELREPLACEMENTꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 89

REMOVINGINSTALLINGTHEANTI-TIPASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 90

PROCEDURE 17 - FWD WHEELCHAIRS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 91

REMOVING/INSTALLING REAR SHROUD ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 91

REMOVING/INSTALLING FRONT SHROUD ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 91

REMOVING/INSTALLING SIDE SHROUD ASSEMBLY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 91

REMOVING/INSTALLING COUNTERWEIGHT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 92

REPLACING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOX SUB-FRAME ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 93

REMOVING/INSTALLING SHOCKSꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 94

SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 95

TIE ROD REPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 95

REMOVING/INSTALLING GEARBOX ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 96

SENSOR CABLE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 97

REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 98

REMOVING/INSTALLING WIRING HARNESS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 99

ADJUSTING WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 101

INSTALLING 90^OFOOTBOARD ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 101

FOOTBOARD ADJUSTMENTS - DEPTH/HEIGHT/ANGLE ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 102

FOOTREST ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 103

LIMITED WARRANTY ꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀꢀ 107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

PHYSICAL

DIMENSIONS

vARROW

** TORQUE **TORQUE SP

JUNIOR

SeatWidthRange:

250 lbs Rating

✪✪16 to 20-inꢀ

*12 to 16-inꢀ

MWD/RWD

*16 to 22-inꢀ

MWD/RWD

*19 to 24-inꢀ

300 lbsꢀ Rating

400 lbsꢀ Rating

16 and 18-inꢀ

✪✪16 to 20-in

*16 to 22-inꢀ

FWD

*16 to 24-inꢀ

SeatDepthRange: *16 to 22-inꢀ

*16 to 18-inꢀ

*16 to 22-inꢀ

*16 to 24-inꢀ

*12 to 15-inꢀ w/CJ Back

Expandable to - *16 to 17-inꢀ

BackHeightRange: *16 to 24-inꢀ

16, 18, 20,22-inꢀ *16 to 22-inꢀ

*12 to 18-inꢀ

Seat-to-Floor

(approximate)

Standard:

Optional:

MWD/RWD

17-1/2-inꢀ

19-3/4-inꢀ

21-inꢀ

FWD

Storm Base

17-1/2-inꢀ

X Base

17-1/2-inꢀ

18-1/4-inꢀ 17-1/2-inꢀ

20-1/2-inꢀ 19-3/4-inꢀ

21-3/4-inꢀ N/A

17-1/2-inꢀ

19-3/4-inꢀ

N/A

17-1/2-inꢀ

19-3/4-inꢀ

21-inꢀ

19-3/4-inꢀ

OverallWidth

ofBase:

24-5/8-inꢀ

25-1/4-inꢀ 24-5/8-inꢀ

24-5/8-inꢀ

(w/ojoystick)

OverallHeight

Standard:

Minimum:

MWD/RWD

34-1/4-inꢀ

44-1/4-inꢀ

FWD

Storm Base

34-1/4-inꢀ

32-1/4-inꢀ

40-1/2-inꢀ

X Base

35-1/2-in

45-1/2-in

34-1/4-inꢀ

N/A

34-1/4-inꢀ

N/A

34-1/4-inꢀ

44-1/4-inꢀ

34-1/4-inꢀ

32-1/4-inꢀ

40-1/2-inꢀ

Maximum:

Recliner - (Std()

Low Seat Frame:

Med( SeatFrame: 53-3/4-inꢀ

51-1/2-inꢀ

52-3/4-inꢀ N/A

55-inꢀ N/A

58-1/2-inꢀ N/A

N/A

51-1/2-inꢀ

53-1/4-inꢀ

55-1/2-inꢀ

N/A

HighSeatFrame:

55-1/2 inꢀ

OverallLength

(withoutfront

riggings)

Standard:

LongFrame:

MWD/RWD

32-1/4-inꢀ

35-1/4-inꢀ

FWD

35-1/4-in

N/A

32-1/4-inꢀ

N/A

32-1/4-inꢀ

N/A

32-1/4-inꢀ

35-1/4-inꢀ

32-1/4-inꢀ

35-1/4-inꢀ

Weight

Standard Motor

W/O Batteries:

W/Batteries:

Standard

MWD/RWD

146 lbsꢀ

FWD

199 lbsꢀ

Storm Base

146 lbsꢀ

X Base

149 lbsꢀ

248 lbsꢀ

N/A

310 lbsꢀ

N/A

229 lbsꢀ

224 lbsꢀ

249 lbsꢀ

176 lbsꢀ

224 lbsꢀ

N/A

176 lbsꢀ

224 lbsꢀ

249 lbsꢀ

176 lbsꢀ

246 lbsꢀ

N/A

176 lbsꢀ

224 lbsꢀ

249 lbsꢀ

176 lbsꢀ

Optional

Shipping(approx(): 176 lbsꢀ

Gearless/Brushless

Motor

W/O Batteries:

W/ Batteries:

Standard

Optional

Shipping(approx(): 196 lbsꢀ

166 lbsꢀ

N/A

169 lbsꢀ

N/A

169 lbsꢀ

166 lbsꢀ

169 lbsꢀ

243 lbsꢀ

268 lbsꢀ

N/A

243 lbsꢀ

268 lbsꢀ

196 lbsꢀ

N/A

243 lbsꢀ

268 lbsꢀ

196 lbsꢀ

266 lbsꢀ

N/A

196 lbsꢀ

243 lbsꢀ

268 lbs(

196 lbsꢀ

DriveAxle:

*✪Adjustable (MWD/RWD only)

*✪Adjustable

*Adjustable

Drive Wheels/Tires:

(FoamFilledor

Pneumatic)

Standard:

Optional:

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

14 X 3-inꢀ

14 X 4-inꢀ

* in 1-inch increments

** StormTorque/Torque SPmodel wheelchairs are available in rear wheel drive ONLYꢀ Gearless Brushless Motor Option is

available on Storm Torque ONLYꢀ

✪ With MKIV RII Controllerꢀ

✪✪With MKIV Rx or A Controllerꢀ u Non-Recliners ONLYꢀ

vArrow specifications refer to RWD, MWD and FWD wheelchairs except where specifiedꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS (Con t in u ed)

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS

vARROW

** TORQUE **TORQUE SP

JUNIOR

Casters w/Precision Sealed Bearings

Semi-Pneumatic

Standard:

Option:

300 lbsꢀ Rating

8X1-3/4-inꢀ

6X2-inꢀ

8X1-3/4-inꢀ

6X2-inꢀ

8X1-3/4-inꢀ

6X2-inꢀ

8X1-3/4-inꢀ 8X1-3/4-inꢀ

6X2-inꢀ

Pneumatic or Foam Filled

Standard:

8X2-inꢀ

9X2-3/4-inꢀ

8X2-inꢀ

9X2-3/4-inꢀ

8X2-inꢀ

9X2-3/4-inꢀ

8X2-inꢀ

Option:

Pneumatic or Foam Filled

400lbsꢀRating

(RWD,MWDonly)

9X2-3/4-inꢀ

Standard:

Option:

8X2-inꢀ

vARROW, ** TORQUE, **TORQUE SP, X and JUNIOR

Anti-Tippers(3-inchwheels):

CasterForks:

Standard(N/AonFWD)

Standard, ShockFork(Optional)

Footrest:

TelescopingFrontRiggingSupports, Swing-Away (Standard),

HeavyDuty(Optional), 4-inchLongerPivotSlideTube(Optional)

Flip Back, Fixed or Adjustable Height (Desk and Full Length)

Adjustable (0^oto 10^o)

Armrests:

Seat Angle Adjustment:

Back Angle Adjustment:

SeatCushion:

Adjustable (80^oto 100^oin 5^oincrements)

Cushion(Optional)

ChairUpholsteryOptions:

Battery/Size (Not Supplied):

Two (2) Required

NaugahydeandNylon

BASEFRAMES

Arroww/Standardmotor

- w/ **Gearless/Brushless motor

Torque w/ StandardMotor

- w/ Gearless/Brushless motor

**Torque SPw/ Standard Motor

RangerXw/StandardMotor

- w/ Gearless/Brushless motor

uSTDBATTERIES uOPTBATTERIES

Group24

Group22

N/A

(uGelBatteries)

Group24

N/A

Group24

PERFORMANCE

ARROW

**TORQUE **TORQUESP

JUNIOR

Speed

(MꢀPꢀHꢀ):

0to5-3/4(300lbsꢀrating)RWD,MWD

0to4-1/4(400lbsꢀrating)RWD,MWD

*0to7-1/4(300lbsꢀrating)RWD,MWD

0 to 4 (400 lbsꢀ rating) FWD

0to6-1/2

0to4-1/4

0to6-1/2

ArrowBase

0to6-1/2

*0 to 7-1/4

XBase

0to6-1/2

*0 to 7-1/4

***Range(miles):

(uGelBatteries) *upto29(Std)-RWD,MWD

*upto29(Opt)-RWD,MWD

upto19-RWD,MWD

upto16(Std) Upto16

upto19(Opt)

*upto29(Std)

upto16(Std) upto19

upto19(Opt) *upto29(Std) upto19(Opt)

*upto29(Std) *upto35(Opt) *upto29(Std)

upto23(Std)

up to 16 - FWD

300lbsꢀ(StandardUnit);400lbsꢀ(FWD)

*300lbsꢀ(StandardUnit)RWD,MWD

400 lbsꢀ (Heavy Duty Unit) RWD,MWD

*upto35(Std)

300lbsꢀ

*300lbsꢀ

*upto35(Opt)

300lbsꢀ

upto35(Opt)

250lbsꢀ

Weight

Limitation:

✪✪250 lbsꢀ

✪300lbsꢀ

250lbsꢀ

*300lbsꢀ

NOTE:InformationbelowisuniquetotheReclinerꢀRefertoArrow,X,Torque,andTorqueSPforcompletespecificationsꢀ

RECLINER

Widths

Depths

BackHeights

Weight Limits (LBSꢀ)

Back Angle Range

90^oto 170^o

14 to 24-inꢀ 16 to 22-inꢀ 18-1/2 to 26-inꢀ Arrow Base -300 Stdꢀ/400 Optional

✪✪Torque SP Base - 250

X, Torque,✪ Torque SP Base - 300

Arrow, X, Torque Base W/ Gearless/

BrushlessMotor -300lbsꢀ

* With gearless/brushless motor optionꢀ

** Storm Torque/Torque SP wheelchairs are available in rear

wheeldriveONLYꢀGearlessBrushlessMotorOptionisavail-

ableonStormTorqueONLYꢀ

***Range will vary with battery conditions,

surface, terrain and operators weightꢀ

✪✪With MKIV Rx or A Controllerꢀ

vArrow specifications refer to RWD, MWD and FWD wheel-

chairs except where specifiedꢀ

Arrow FWD has a 400 lbꢀ ratingꢀ

✪✪With MKIV RII Controllerꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 1

GENERAL GUIDELINES

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Repair or Service Information

Operating Information

REPAIR OR SERVICE INFORMATION

Se t-up of the Ele c tronic Control Unit is to b e p e rform e d ONLY b y ind ivid ua ls c e rtifie d b y

Inva c a re . The fina l tuning a d justm e nts o f the c o ntro lle r m a y a ffe c t o the r a c tivitie s o f

the whe e lc ha ir. Da m a g e to the e q uip m e nt c o uld o c c ur und e r the se c irc um sta nc e s. If

no n-c e rtifie d ind ivid ua ls p e rfo rm a ny wo rk o n the se units, the wa rra nty is vo id .

OPERATING INFORMATION

GENERAL WARNINGS

Pe rfo rm a nc e a d justm e nts sho uld o nly b e m a d e b y p ro fe ssio na ls o f the he a lthc a re fie ld

o r p e rso ns fully c o nve rsa nt with this p ro c e ss a nd the d rive r's c a p a b ilitie s. Inc o rre c t se t-

ting s c ould c a use injury to the d rive r, b ysta nd e rs, d a m a g e to the c ha ir a nd to surround ing

p ro p e rty.

Afte r the whe e lc ha ir ha s b e e n se t-up , c he c k to m a ke sure tha t the whe e lc ha ir p e rform s

to the sp e c ific a tio ns e nte re d d uring the se t-up p ro c e d ure . If the whe e lc ha ir d o e s NOT

p e rform to sp e c ific a tions, turn the whe e lc ha ir OFF im m e d ia te ly a nd re e nte r se t-up sp e c i-

fic a tio ns. Re p e a t this p ro c e d ure until the whe e lc ha ir p e rfo rm s to sp e c ific a tio ns.

DO NOT use p a rts, a c c e ssorie s, or a d a p te rs othe r tha n those a uthorize d b y Inva c a re .

TIRE PRESSURE

DO NOT use your whe e lc ha ir unle ss it ha s the p rop e r tire p re ssure (P.S.I.). DO NOT ove rin-

fla te the tire s. Fa ilure to fo llo w the se sug g e stio ns m a y c a use the tire to e xp lo d e a nd

c a use b od ily ha rm . The re c om m e nd e d tire p re ssure is liste d on the sid e wa ll of the tire .

ELEC TRIC AL

Gro und ing Instruc tio ns:

DO NOT, und e r a ny c irc um sta nc e s, c ut o r re m o ve the ro und g ro und ing p ro ng fro m a ny

p lug use d with o r fo r Inva c a re p ro d uc ts. So m e d e vic e s a re e q uip p e d with thre e -p ro ng

(g round ing ) p lug s for p rote c tion a g a inst p ossib le shoc k ha za rd s. Whe re a two-p rong wa ll

re c e p ta c le is e nc ounte re d , it is the p e rsona l re sp onsib ility a nd ob lig a tion of the c ustom e r

to c o nta c t a q ua lifie d e le c tric ia n a nd ha ve the two -p ro ng re c e p ta c le re p la c e d with a

p ro p e rly g ro und e d thre e -p ro ng wa ll re c e p ta c le in a c c o rd a nc e with the Na tio na l Ele c -

tric a l Co d e . If yo u m ust use a n e xte nsio n c o rd , use ONLY a thre e -wire e xte nsio n c o rd

ha ving the sa m e or hig he r e le c tric a l ra ting a s the d e vic e b e ing c onne c te d . In a d d ition,

Inva c a re ha s p la c e d RED/ ORANGE WARNING TAGS o n so m e e q uip m e nt. DO NOT re -

m o ve the se ta g s. Ca re fully re a d b a tte ry/ b a tte ry c ha rg e r info rm a tio n p rio r to insta lling ,

se rvic ing o r o p e ra ting yo ur whe e lc ha ir.

BATTERIES

The wa rra nty a nd p e rfo rm a nc e sp e c ific a tio ns c o nta ine d in this m a nua l a re b a se d o n

the use o f d e e p c yc le g e l c e ll o r se a le d le a d a c id b a tte rie s. Inva c a re stro ng ly

re c o m m e nd s the ir use a s the p o we r so urc e fo r this unit.

Ba tte ry c o nne c ting c a b le s a re NOT inte rc ha ng e a b le . Ba tte ry c o nne c ting c a b le s with

sing le fuse se tup MUST o nly b e use d o n whe e lc ha irs with c o nve ntio na l m o to r/ g e a rb o x

a sse m b ly. Othe rwise , d a m a g e m a y re sult. Re fe r to INSTALLING/ REMOVING BATTERIES

INTO/ FROM BATTERY BOX(ES) in PROCEDURE 9 o f this m a nua l.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

GENERAL GUIDELINES

PROCEDURE 1

WARNING/ CAUTION LABEL LOCATION - RWD MODELS

NOTE: These caution labels are only found on bat-

tery boxes used with the gearless/brushless motor

SUSPENSION ARM

USED

WITH CONVENTIONAL

MO TO R/ G EARBO X

ASSEMBLY

GROUP 24 BATTERIES

GROUP 22 BATTERIES

SUSPENSION ARM USED

WITH GEARLESS/BRUSHLESS

MOTOR

ONE (1) CONNECTOR BATTERY

BOX WIRING HARNESS

NOTE: This wiring harness is found on wheel-

chair models built BEFORE 11/15/99ꢀ

NOTE: This caution label is only

found on wiring harnesses used

withtheconventionalmotor/gear-

box applicationꢀ

NOTE: This wiring harness is found on

wheelchair models built AFTER 11/15/99ꢀ

NOTE: WARNING LABEL also

found on side frame near the rear

of the chairꢀ

NOTE:Formodelswiththegearless/brushlessmotor, read the

manufacturer’sCAUTIONLABELlocatedonsideofthemotorꢀ

(Drivewheelmustberemovedtoviewcautionlabelꢀ)

MUST

1070497

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 1

GENERAL GUIDELINES

WARNING/ CAUTION LABEL LOCATION

MWD MODELS

NOTE: Stablilizer springs

are found on models built

BEFORE 7/11/99 ONLYꢀ

NOTE: CAUTION LABEL also

foundonsideframenearthefront

of the chairꢀ

Suspension Arm

(located on inside of

drive wheel)

FWD MODELS

BATTERY BOX WIRING HARNESS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

PROCEDURE 2

4ꢀ Placethevoltmeterleadsintothechargerplugonthe

wheelchairꢀMostdigitalvoltmetersarenotaffectedby

polarity, however, analog meters (meters with swing-

ing needles) can be and should be used carefullyꢀ A

good meter reading should be 25ꢀ5 to 26 VDCꢀ

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Field Load Test

Using Hydrometer To Check Battery Cells (Lead

Acid)

Motor Testing

5ꢀ Have two (2) individuals (one [1] on each arm) apply

asmuchdownwardpressureaspossibleonthearms

of the wheelchairꢀ

Motor Brush Inspection

Electro-Mechanical Parking Brake Testing

6ꢀ Turn the wheelchair ON and push the joystick for-

ward, trying to drive the wheelchair through the sta-

tionary objectꢀ This puts a heavy load on the batteries

astheytrytopushthroughthestationaryobjectꢀRead

the meter while the motors are straining to determine

thevoltageunderloadꢀ

FIELD LOAD TEST (FIGURE 1)

NOTE: The following test can also be performed through

the controller of the wheelchair along with a remote pro-

grammerꢀ Refer to the individual CONTROLLER

MANUALsupplied with each wheelchairꢀ

NOTE: If the voltage drops to less than 23ꢀ5 volts from a

pairoffullychargedbatterieswhileunderload, theyshould

be replaced regardless of the unloaded voltagesꢀ

Oldbatterieslosetheirabilitytostoreandreleasepower,due

to increased internal resistanceꢀ This means that as you try

totakepowerfromthebattery,someofthatpowerisusedup

intheprocessofpassingthroughthebattery,resultinginless

voltage at the postsꢀ The more power drawn, the lower the

voltageavailableꢀWhenthislostvoltagedropstheoutput1ꢀ0

volts under load (2ꢀ0 for a pair), replace the batteriesꢀ

Battery Charger

(-)

Connector

(+)

Testing under load is the only way to spot this problemꢀ

While special battery load testing equipment is available,

it is costly and difficult to transportꢀ

Digital Voltmeter

Useadigitalvoltmetertocheckbatterychargelevelatthecharger

connectorꢀ It is located on the base of the wheelchair frameꢀ

FIGURE 1 - FIELD LOAD TEST

NOTE: READ the instructions CAREFULLY before us-

ing the digital voltmeterꢀ

USING HYDROMETER TO CHECK

BATTERY CELLS (LEAD ACID)

(FIGURE 2)

NOTE: Invacare recommends that ONLY qualified ser-

vice personnel perform this testꢀ

1ꢀ Ensure that power is OFFꢀ

NOTE: Perform this procedure when a digital voltmeter is

not availableꢀ

2ꢀ Make sure battery is fully chargedꢀ An extremely dis-

charged battery will exhibit the same symptoms as a

badoneꢀ

WARNING

NEVER sm o ke o r strike a m a tc h ne a r the

b a tte rie s. If the c a p s o f the b a tte ry c e lls

a re re m o ve d , NEVER lo o k d ire c tly into

the m whe n c ha rg ing the b a tte ry.

3ꢀ Remove the footrests from the wheelchair and per-

form one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ RWD MODELS - place the CASTERS of the

wheelchair against a wall, workbench or other

stationary objectꢀ

The use of rub b e r g love s a nd c h e m ic a l

g o g g le s o r fa c e shie ld s is re c omme nde d

whe n working with b a tte rie s.

Bꢀ MWD MODELS - place the STABILIZER

wheels of the wheelchair against a wall, work-

bench or other stationary objectꢀ

Cꢀ FWD MODELS -place the DRIVE wheels of

the wheelchair against a wall, workbench or

other stationary objectꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 2

TROUBLESHOOTING

WARNING

Whe n re a d ing a hyd ro m e te r, DO NOT a l-

lo w a ny liq uid to c o m e in c o nta c t with

your e ye s or skin. It is a form of a c id a nd

c a n c a use se rio us b urns, a nd in so m e

c a se s, blindne ss. If you do ge t ba tte ry a c id

on you, flush the e xp ose d a re a s with c ool

wa te r IMMEDIATELY. If the a c id c om e s into

c onta c t with e ye s or c a use s se rious b urns,

g e t m e d ic a l he lp IMMEDIATELY.

Number of Floating

Balls Will Vary

TROUBLESHOOTING

According to Charge

FIGURE 2 - USING HYDROMETER TO CHECK

BATTERY CELLS (LEAD ACID)

The b a tte ry a c id c a n d a m a g e your whe e l-

c ha ir, c lo thing , a nd ho use ho ld ite m s.

The re fo re , ta ke re a d ing s c a utio usly a nd

o nly in d e sig na te d a re a s.

9ꢀ Flush hydrometer in cold running water by allowing

the water to rise into hydrometer as far as possibleꢀ

Do this several times to guard against burn damageꢀ

ONLY use d istille d wa te r whe n top p ing off

the b a tte ry c e lls.

10ꢀ Replace the battery capsꢀ

Most ba tte rie s a re not sold with instruc tions.

Howe ve r, wa rning s a re fre q ue ntly note d

on the c e ll c a p s. Re a d the m c a re fully.

11ꢀ Reinstall battery boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVINGBATTERYBOXES-GROUP24BATTERY

BASE FRAMES or INSTALLING/REMOVING BAT-

TERYBOX-GROUP22BATTERYBASEFRAMES

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING BATTERY BOXES - GROUP 24 BAT-

TERYBASEFRAMESorINSTALLING/REMOVING

BATTERY BOX - GROUP 22 BATTERY BASE

FRAMES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

MOTOR TESTING (FIGURE 3)

NOTE: This procedure should only be performed on

wheelchairswiththeconventionalmotor/gearboxassem-

blyꢀ For gearless/brushless motors, there are no service-

able partsꢀ Return motor to manufacturer for testingꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the battery caps from the batteryꢀ

3ꢀ Squeeze the air from the hydrometerꢀ

4ꢀ Place the hydrometer into a battery cellꢀ

1ꢀ On the 4-pin motor connector, locate the two (2) con-

tacts in the red and black housingsꢀ

NOTE: DO NOT fill hydrometer more than 3/4 fullꢀ

5ꢀ Draw up sufficient acid to cover float ballsꢀ

6ꢀ Tap lightly to remove air bubblesꢀ

2ꢀ Set the digital multimeter to measure ohms (Ω)ꢀ

3ꢀ Measure the resistance between the two (2) motor

contactsꢀ

7ꢀ Number of floating balls indicates chargeꢀ

Num ber of Floating Balls

NOTE: A normal reading is between 1 and 5 ohms

(Ω)ꢀ A reading of 0 ohms (Ω) or in excess of 15 ohms

(Ω) indicates a problemꢀ High readings are generally

caused by bad connections and/or damaged brushesꢀ

Contact authorized dealer or Invacareꢀ

Discharged

25% Charged

50% Charged

75% Charged

100% Charged

Overcharged

* 5

* Check charging systemꢀ

8ꢀ Flush the liquid back into the same cell after reading

thefloatꢀRepeatthisstepuntilallcellshavebeenprop-

erlyreadꢀAshortedordeadcellcanbedetectedwhen

it is the only cell that does not chargeꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

TROUBLESHOOTING

PROCEDURE 2

Cap

Motor

4 Pin Motor Connector

FIGURE 4 - MOTOR BRUSH INSPECTION

ELECTRO-MECHANICAL PARKING

BRAKE TESTING (FIGURE 5)

Ohmmeter

NOTE: This procedure should only be performed on

wheelchairs with conventional motor/gearbox assemblyꢀ

Motor Connector

1ꢀ On the four-pin motor connector, locate the side by

side connectors in the black housingsꢀ

FIGURE 3 - MOTOR TESTING

2ꢀ Set the digital multimeter to read ohms (Ω)ꢀ

MOTOR BRUSH INSPECTION

(FIGURE 4)

3ꢀ Measure the resistance between the two (2) brake con-

tactsꢀ A normal reading is 100 ohms (Ω)ꢀ A reading of 0

ohms (Ω) or a very high reading; iꢀeꢀ, MEG ohms or OꢀLꢀ

(outoflimit)indicatesashortedbrakeoranopenconnec-

tion respectivelyꢀ If either condition exists, send the motor

toInvacareTechnicalServiceforinspection/repairꢀ

NOTE:Thisprocedureshouldonlybeperformedonwheel-

chairs with conventional motor/gearbox assemblyꢀ

There are two (2) contact brushes on ACTION STORM mo-

tors located under the brush caps on the motor housingꢀ If

thesecapsarehardtoremovetheyareeitherovertightenedor

the motor has become very hotꢀ Let motors coolꢀ If caps still

cannotberemoved,itisrecommendedthatthemotorbesent

to InvacareTechnical Services for inspection/repairꢀ

C AUTIO N

A shorte d e le c tro-m e c ha nic a l b ra ke will

da ma ge the bra ke output se c tion in the c on-

trolle r. DO NOT c onne c t a shorte d e le c tro-

me c ha nic a l bra ke to a good c ontrolle r mod-

ule . A shorte d bra ke MUST be re pla c e d.

NOTE: It is very important to note which way the brush

comes out of the motorꢀ The brush MUST be placed into

the motor exactly the same way to ensure good contact

with the commutatorꢀ

NOTE: A bad motor can damage the controller module

but a bad controller will NOT damage a motorꢀ

1ꢀ Once the motor brush caps have been removed, pull

the brushes out of the motorꢀ The end of the brushes

should be smooth and shiny and the spring should

not be damaged or discoloredꢀ If one or both of the

brushes are damaged, only the damaged or worn

brushes need be replacedꢀ It is very important that

any time a brush is replaced, it must be “burned in”ꢀ

This is accomplished by running the motor for one

hour in each direction with a half hour break in-be-

tweenꢀ This should also be done with little or no load

on the motor, iꢀeꢀ, put the wheelchair up on blocks so

the drive (large) wheels do not contact the ground

and run the wheelchairꢀ A motor with only one brush

replacedwillonlycarryasmallpercentageofitsrated

load capacity until the NEW brush is burned inꢀ

Motor

Cap

4 Pin Motor Connector

Ohmmeter

FIGURE 5 - ELECTRO-MECHANICAL

PARKING BRAKE TESTING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 3

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

STANDARD SEAT FRAME

*Torque to

60 in/lbs

*Loctite and

Torque to

75 in/lbs

*Loctite^®and

Torque to

75 in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

**Torque

156 in/lbs

**Torque to

156 in/lbs

**Torque to

156 in/lbs

**Torque to

156 in/lbs

NOTE:

* These torque specifications also apply to the adjustable seat frame assemblyꢀ

** These torque specifications also apply to the captains van seat and adjustable seat frame assembliesꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

PROCEDURE 3

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

*CAPTAINS VAN SEAT

*ADJ USTABLE SEAT FRAME

Torque to

156-in/lbs

Torque to

156-in/lbs

Torque to

75-in/lbs

Loctite and Torque to

75 in/lbs

Torque to

156-in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

Torque to

156-in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

* NOTE: For additional torque specifications, refer to the torque specifications drawing for the standard

seat frame assemblyꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 3

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

REAR WHEEL DRIVE BASE FRAME HARDWARE

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Loctite and torque to

160 in/lbs

Torque to

1020 in/lbs

REAR OF

WHEELC HAIR

Loctite and

Torque to

75 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Tighten until snug

Loctite and

torque to

75 in/lbs

FRONT OF

WHEELC HAIR

8 - inch Wheels -

Torque to 120 in/lbs

9 - inch Wheels -

Torque to 160 in/lbs

Pneumatic with Flat-Free

Wheel Halves - Torque to

160 in/lbs

Pneumatic Wheel Halves -

8 - inch - Torque to 18 in/lbs

9 - inch - Torque to 160 in/lbs

Wheel Halves -

Torque to 75 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

CONVENTIONAL MOTOR/ GEARBOX

GEARLESS/BRUSHLESSMOTOR

NOTE: All torque specifications called out for the con-

ventional motor/gearbox assembly are applicable to

the gearless/brushless motor except for the following:

Torque to 13 ft/lbsꢀ

Torque to 75 in/lbsꢀ

Torque to 13 ft/lbsꢀ

Torque to 25 in/lbsꢀ

Torque to 13 ft/lbsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

PROCEDURE 3

MID-WHEEL DRIVE BASE FRAME HARDWARE

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Loctite and torque to

Torque to

FRONT OF

160 in/lbs

WHEELCHAIR

Torque to

40 in/lbs

Torque to

1020 in/lbs

Tighten

until snug

Loctite and

torque to

75 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

REAR OF

WHEELCHAIR

Loctite and

Torque to

75 in/lbs

8 - inch Wheels -

Torque to 120 in/lbs

9 - inch Wheels -

Pneumatic with Flat-Free

Wheel Halves - Torque to 160

in/lbs

Pneumatic Wheel Halves -

8 - inch - Torque to 18 in/lbs 9 -

inch - Torque to 160 in/lbs

Wheel Halves -

Torque to 75 in/lbs

Torque to 160 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 3

HARDWARE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE BASE FRAME HARDWARE

TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

REAR OF

Torque to

WHEELC HAIR

156 in/lbs

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

Torque to

15 in/lbs

Torque to

360 in/lbs

Torque to

1020 in/lbs

8 - inch Wheels -

Torque to 120 in/lbs

9 - inch Wheels -

Torque to 160 in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

Pneumatic with Flat-Free

Wheel Halves - Torque to 160

in/lbs

Pneumatic Wheel Halves -

8 - inch - Torque to 18 in/lbs

9 - inch - Torque to 160 in/lbs

Torque to

360 in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

Torque to

156 in/lbs

Loctite and

Torque to

75 in/lbs

FRONT OF

WHEELC HAIR

Torque to

160 in/lbs

Wheel Halves -

Torque to 75 in/lbs

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ARMS

PROCEDURE 4

REPLACING CAPTAINS VAN SEAT

ARMREST PLATE (FIGURE 2)

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Replacing Armrest Pads - Captains Van Seats

Replacing Captains Van Seat Armrest Plate

1ꢀ Ifnecessary,removethethree(3)mountingscrews,

spacers and locknuts that secure the joystick mount-

ing bracket to the armrest plateꢀ

WARNING

Afte r ANY a d justm e nts, re p a ir o r se rvic e

a nd BEFORE use , ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta c h-

ing ha rd wa re is tig hte ne d se c ure ly - o th-

e rwise injury or d a m a g e m a y re sult.

2ꢀ Remove armrest padꢀ Refer to REPLACING ARM-

RESTPADS - CAPTAINS VAN SEATS in this proce-

dure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washers and locknut that

secure the existing armrest plate to the arm weldmentꢀ

REPLACING ARMREST PADS -

CAPTAINS VAN SEATS (FIGURE 1)

4ꢀ PositiontheNEWarmrestplateonthearmrestweldment

andsecurewiththemountingscrew,washers,andlock-

nutꢀRefertoFIGURE2forcorrecthardwareorientationꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the mounting screws that secures the front

of the armrest pad to the armrest plateꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstall van style armrest padꢀ Refer to REPLAC-

ING ARMREST PADS - CAPTAINS VAN SEATS in

this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the rear of

the armrest pad and armrest insert to the armrest

plateꢀ

6ꢀ Ifnecessary, reinstallthethree(3)mountingscrews,

spacers and locknuts that secure the joystick mount-

ing bracket to the armrest plateꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the existing armrest pad and position the

NEW armrest pad on the armrest plateꢀ

7ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-6 for the opposite armrest plate, if

necessaryꢀ

4ꢀ Lineupthemountingholesinthearmrestinsert, arm-

rest plate and NEW armrest padꢀ

Locknut

Washer

5ꢀ Reinstall the rear mounting screw through the arm-

rest insert, armrest plate and armrest pad and tighten

securelyꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the front mounting screw into the armrest

plate and NEWarmrestpadandtightensecurelyꢀ

Mounting

Screw

REAR

FRO NT

Armrest

Plate

Armrest

Insert

Armrest

Pad

Washer

Arm Weldment

Mounting

Screw

FIGURE 2 - REPLACING CAPTAINS VAN SEAT

ARMREST PLATE

Armrest Plate

Mounting

Screw

FIGURE 1 - REPLACING ARMREST PADS -

CAPTAINS VAN SEATS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 5

UPHOLSTERY/POSITIONING STRAP

REPLACING BACK UPHOLSTERY

(FIGURE 2)

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Replacing Seat Positioning Strap - Captains Van

Seats

1ꢀ Remove one (1) armrest from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARMRESTSin

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

Replacing Back Upholstery

WARNING

2ꢀ If applicable, remove the two (2) mounting screws

andlocknutsthatsecurethespreaderbartotheback

canesꢀ

After ANY a djustments, repa ir or service a nd BE-

FORE use, ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta ching ha rdwa re

is tightened securely - otherwise injury or da ma ge

ma y result.

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and washers

that secure the existing back upholstery to the back

canesꢀ

REPLACING SEAT POSITIONING

STRAP - CAPTAINS VAN SEATS

(FIGURE 1)

4ꢀ Cut the tie-wraps that secure the bottom of the exist-

ing back upholstery to the back canesꢀ

NOTE:Notethebackanglebeforedisassemblyforproper

reinstallation/

1ꢀ Remove the van style seat from the van seat frameꢀ

Referto INSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINS VAN

SEATASSEMBLYinPROCEDURE6ofthismanualꢀ

5ꢀ On the side of the wheelchair that the armrest was

removed, remove one (1) of the mounting screws,

washer, spacer, and locknut that secures the back

cane to the seat frameꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) rear mounting screws, washers,

and locknuts that secure the seat positioning straps

to the van seat frameꢀ

NOTE:Toavoidlosingtheinsertineachbackcane, thread

the mounting screw just removed through the cane from

the inside of the wheelchair to hold the insert in place/

NOTE: The washer is positioned between the seat posi-

tioning strap and the mounting screw/

3ꢀ Secure the NEW seat positioning strap halves with

the mounting screws, washers and locknuts to the

van seat frame and torque to 75-inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the other mounting screw, washer, spacer,

and locknut that secures the back cane to the seat

frameꢀ

4ꢀ Reinstall the van style seat to the van seat frameꢀ

Referto INSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINS VAN

SEATASSEMBLYinPROCEDURE6ofthismanualꢀ

7ꢀ Slide the back cane out of the spreader bar (If appli-

cable)andtheexistingbackupholsteryꢀ

8ꢀ Remove other armrest from the chairꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARMRESTS in

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

Van Seat Frame

Seat Positioning

Strap

9ꢀ RepeatSTEPS5-7fortheoppositesideofthewheel-

chairꢀ

REAR OF SEAT

10ꢀ Slide the other back cane out of the spreader bar (if

applicable)andtheexistingbackupholsteryꢀ

Mounting

Screw

FRAME

11ꢀ Slide one(1) back cane into NEW back upholstery

and through spreader bar (if applicable)ꢀ

12ꢀ Secure back cane to the seat frame from the outside

of the wheelchair with the existing two (2) mounting

screws, washers, spacers, and locknutsꢀ Use Loctite

242 and torque to 75-in/lbsꢀ

Locknuts

FRONT OF SEAT

FRAME

Washer

13ꢀ Repeat STEPS 11-12 for opposite back caneꢀ

FIGURE 1 - REPLACING SEAT POSITIONING STRAP -

CAPTAINS VAN SEATS

14ꢀ Secure the top of the NEW back upholstery to the

backcaneswiththetwo(2)existingmountingscrewsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPHOLSTERY/POSITIONING STRAP

PROCEDURE 5

HEAVY DUTY MODELS

NOTE: When replacing the back upholstery, back as-

sembly or changing back height, follow these guidelines

for spreader bar height:

NOTE: Spreader bar required on all back heights/

BACK HEIGHT

u SPREADER BAR

HEIGHT

STANDARD MODELS

BACK HEIGHT

u SPREADER BAR

HEIGHT

16-17-inches

18-24-inches

5-inches

7-inches

16-inches*

17-inches*

5-inches

uHeight of Spreader Bar from Bottom of Back

Canes to Top of Spreader Bar Clamp-

18-19-inches*

20-24-inches

7-inches

15ꢀ Ifapplicable, repositionthespreaderbaratthecorrect

height for the corresponding back height and torque

the mounting hardware to 60-in/lbsꢀ

NOTE: Spreader Bar required on ALL back heights be-

tween 20-24-inches/ *Spreader bar required on back

heights 16,17,18, or 19 ONLY if the width or depth of the

chair exceeds 19-inches/

16ꢀ Reinstall the armrest onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REMOVING FLIP BACK ARMRESTS in

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

uHeight of Spreader Bar from Bottom of Back

Canes to Top of Spreader Bar Clamp-

Locknuts

(STEPS 5, 6)

Back Cane

(STEPS 3, 12)

Mounting

Screw

(STEPS 3, 14)

Spacers

(STEPS 5, 6)

Washer

(STEPS 3, 14)

Back

Upholstery

(STEPS 3, 7)

Locknut

(STEP 2)

Locknut

(STEP 2)

Spreader Bar

(STEPS 2, 7, 16)

Mounting Screw

Torque to 60 in/lbs

(STEP 2)

Mounting

Screw

(STEP 2)

Mounting

Screws

(STEPS 5, 6)

Insert

Washers

(STEPS 5, 6)

Washers

(STEPS 5, 6)

Seat Frame

Mounting Screws

Torque to 75 in/lbs

(STEPS 5, 6)

FIGURE 2 - REPLACING BACK UPHOLSTERY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

1ꢀ Remove footrest assembliesꢀ Refer to PROCEDURE

4 in of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

This Procedure includes the following:

Preparation for Removing/Installing Seat Frame

(Standard Frame, Adjustable Frame,

and Captains Van Seat) 6666666666666666666666666666Page 21

2ꢀ Remove battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVINGGROUP24BATTERYBOXESorINSTALL-

ING/REMOVINGGROUP22BATTERYBOXinPRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Replacing Exact Same Size Standard

Seat Frame 6666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 22

Adjustment Lock Back Upholstery

Removing/Installing Standard Seat Frame

Sub-Assembly 66666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 22

Lever for Joystick

(STEP 10)

Flip Back

Armrests

(STEP 6A)

(STEP 4)

Changing Seat Depth 6666666666666666666666666666666Page 23

Battery

Changing Seat Width (Standard and Adjustable

Seat Frame) 666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 25

Box(es)

(STEP 2)

Footrest

Location

(STEP 1)

Installing/Removing Adjustable Seat Frame

Sub-Assembly and/or Component

Replacement 6666666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 26

Installing/Removing Captains Van Seat

Assembly 666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 28

Replacing Captains Van Seat and/or Captains

Van Seat Frame 666666666666666666666666666666666666666Page 28

Joystick

(STEPS

3,5)

Converting From Standard Seat Frame to

Adjustable Seat Frame or Vice Versa 6666666Page 29

Converting From Adjustable Seat Frame to

Captains Van Seat or Vice Versa666666666666666Page 29

Converting From Standard Seat Frame to

Captains Van Seat or Vice Versa666666666666666Page 30

Removing/Installing Seat Pan 666666666666666666Page 30

Mounting Plate - Seat Angle Adjustment and

Installation Orientation 66666666666666666666666666666Page 31

Seat Pan

(STEP 7)

WARNING

Afte r ANY a d justm e nts, re p a ir o r se rvic e

a nd BEFORE use , m a ke sure tha t a ll a t-

ta c hing ha rd wa re is tig hte ne d se c ure ly -

o the rwise injury o r d a m a g e m a y re sult.

Seat Positioning

Strap (STEP 7)

Controller, Left/Right Motor

Connectors (STEPS 8,9)

NOTE: The procedures in this section of the manual refer

to NON-RECLINER seat frames only, EXCEPT Seat

AngleAdjustment/ Forreclinerseatframes, refertoPRO-

CEDURE 14 of this manual/

STEP 6B

Height

Adjustment

Holes

PREPARATIONS FOR REMOVING/

INSTALLING SEAT FRAME

(STANDARD FRAME, ADJ USTABLE

FRAME, AND CAPTAINS VAN SEAT)

(FIGURE 1)

Socket

Screw

Captains

Van Seat

Base

NOTE: Illustration depicts tubular seat frame only/ Prepa-

ration steps for the captains van seat apply in the same

manner/

NOTE:Wheninstalling/replacingcomponentsofthewheel-

chair, refer to the individual procedure for correct use of

LOCTITE 242andtorquespecificationsorPROCEDURE

3 of this manual/

FIGURE 1 - PREPARATIONS FOR REMOVING/

INSTALLING SEAT FRAME (STANDARD FRAME,

ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAPTAINS VAN SEAT)

NOTE: To reinstall these components, reverse the follow-

ing steps/

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT FRAME

PROCEDURE 6

4ꢀ ReinstallthecomponentspreviouslyremovedinSTEP

1ꢀPerformtheinstructionsoutlinedinPREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT)in this procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Cut tie wraps and disconnect joystick from controllerꢀ

4ꢀ Turn the lever on the adjustment lock to release the

adjustment lock from the joystick mounting tubeꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the joystick from the wheelchairꢀ

6ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

REMOVING/ INSTALLING

STANDARD SEAT FRAME

SUBASSEMBLY (FIGURE 2)

Aꢀ STANDARD OR ADJUSTABLE SEAT

FRAMES - Remove the flip-back armrests from

thewheelchairꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOVING

FLIP BACK ARMRESTS in PROCEDURE 4 of

the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

NOTE: Perform steps required from starting procedureꢀ

Rem oving

Bꢀ CAPTAINS VAN SEAT - Remove the mounting

screw that secures the armrest to the van seat

frameꢀ Repeat for opposite sideꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws, locknuts and

spacers, if applicable, that secure the standard seat

frame subassembly to the seat mounting platesꢀ

7ꢀ For standard and adjustable seat frames, remove the

seat pan (including seat positioning straps)ꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATPANinthisprocedure

of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the existing standard seat frameꢀ

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-

inch pounds)

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-

inch pounds)

8ꢀ Disconnectbatteryandleft/rightmotorconnectorsfrom

the controllerꢀ Refer to REPLACING WIRING HAR-

NESS in PROCEDURE 10 of this manualꢀ

9ꢀ Remove tie-wraps that secures the wiring harness to

the seat frame and the charger cable from its mount-

ingbracketꢀRefertoREPLACINGWIRINGHARNESS

in PROCEDURE 10 of this manualꢀ

10ꢀ For standard and adjustable seat frames, remove the

back upholstery (including back canes and spreader

bar, if applicable)ꢀ Refer to REPLACING BACK UP-

HOLSTERY in PROCEDURE 5 of the manualꢀ

Spacer

(16-inch

Wide Only)

Standard

Seat

Assembly

11ꢀ Refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

Spacer

(16-inch Wide

Only)

REPLACING EXACT SAME SIZE

STANDARD SEAT FRAME

Seat

Mounting

Plate

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT)in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the existing standard seat frame subassem-

bly and install the NEW standard frameꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT FRAME

SUBASSEMBLY in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Locknuts

3ꢀ FOR 12-15-INCH SEAT DEPTHS ONLY: Remove

the CJ back brackets from the existing standard seat

frame and install onto the NEW standard seat frameꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACKBRACK-

ETS FROM SEAT FRAME in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Base Frame

NOTE: For 16-inch wide seat frames, there will be spac-

erspositionedbetweentheseatframeandtheseatmount-

ing platesꢀ

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD

SEAT FRAME SUB-ASSEMBLY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

Bꢀ If the desired change only requires a NEW seat

pan,refertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATPAN

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

Installing

Cꢀ For all other seat depth changes, perform the fol-

lowing:

1ꢀ Position NEW standard seat frame subassembly on

seat mount platesꢀ

l PREPARATIONS FOR REMOVING/IN-

STALLING SEAT FRAME (STANDARD

FRAME,ADJUSTABLEFRAME,ANDCAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

2ꢀ Secure NEW standard seat frame subassembly onto

seat mounting plates with the existing four (4) mount-

ingscrews, locknutsandspacers, ifapplicableꢀTorque

to 156-inch poundsꢀ

Perform one (1), two (2), or all three (3) of the pro-

cedures listed below depending on the compo-

nents required for the desired seat depth deter-

mined from STEPS 1-5:

3ꢀ Refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

l REMOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACKBRACK-

CHANGING SEAT DEPTH

ETS in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Standard Seat Fram e

l REMOVING/INSTALLINGSTANDARDSEAT

SUBASSEMBLY in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

NOTE: Review the chart belowꢀ This will determine the

components needed to obtain the desired seat depthꢀ

l REMOVING/INSTALLING SEATPAN in this

C O MPO NENT IDENTIFIC ATIO N TABLE

FO R STANDARD SEAT FRAME

procedure of the manualꢀ

Aftercompletingtheprocedure(s)listedabove,per-

form the steps outlined in PREPARATIONS FOR

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT) to complete the desired

seat depth changeꢀ

SEAT FRAME COMPONENTS

CJ BACK

SEAT

SEAT BRACKETS SEAT

FRAME

DEPTH

DEPTH REQUIRED

PAN

12-inches

YES

17-inch

16-inch deep

Adjustable Seat Fram e (FIGURE 3)

15-inches

16-inches

17-inches

18-inches

19-inches

20-inches

21-inches

22-inches

NOTE:ReviewthechartbelowꢀThiswilldeterminethecom-

ponents needed to obtain your desired seat depthꢀ

16-inch

17-inch

18-inch

19-inch

20-inch

21-inch

22-inch

16-inch deep

18-inch deep

20-inch deep

22-inch deep

C O MPO NENT IDENTIFIC ATIO N TABLE

FO R STANDARD SEAT FRAME

SEAT FRAME COMPONENTS

CJ BACK

SEAT BRACKETS SEAT

SIDE CENTER

1ꢀ Find current seat depth in left hand column in the chartꢀ

2ꢀ Follow that row to right under seat frame componentsꢀ

3ꢀ Verifyandnotethecomponentsofthecurrentseatdepthꢀ

4ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-3 for your desired seat depthꢀ

DEPTH REQUIRED PAN FRAME FRAME

12-inches

YES

17-inch Short

Short

15-inches

16-inches

17-inches

18-inches

19-inches

20-inches

21-inches

22-inches

16-inch

17-inch Short

18-inch Medium Short

19-inch Medium Short

20-inch

21-inch

Short

5ꢀ Compareexistingcomponentsofthecurrentseatdepth

andtherequiredcomponentsforthedesiredseatdepthꢀ

6ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Long

Aꢀ If the current seat depth and the desired seat depth

iswithinthe12-15-inchseatdepthrange,thischange

can be accomplished by repositioning the back

canes on the CJ back bracketsꢀ Refer to CHANG-

ING SEATDEPTH BETWEEN 12-15-INCHES in

this procedure of the manualꢀ

22-inch X-Long Long

NOTE: Note the four (4) different lengths of side frames

short, medium, long, and X-long, as well as the two differ-

ent center frames, short and longꢀ These components are

interchanged to obtain the various different seat depthsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT FRAME

PROCEDURE 6

1ꢀ Find current seat depth in left hand column in the chartꢀ

2ꢀ Follow that row to right under seat frame componentsꢀ

3ꢀ Verifyandnotethecomponentsofthecurrentseatdepthꢀ

4ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-3 for the desired seat depthꢀ

NOTE: If seat width adjustment is also desired, re-

fer to CHANGING SEAT WIDTH in this procedure

ofthemanualformountingholelocationsandallow-

ableseatwidth/seatdepthcombinationsꢀ

Mounting

Screws

(Torque to 75-

inch pounds)

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-

inch pounds)

5ꢀ Compareexistingcomponentsofthecurrentseatdepth

andtherequiredcomponentsforthedesiredseatdepthꢀ

To adjust the depth of the seat on the wheelchair, use

the following guidelines:

If the current seat depth is and the desired seat depth are

within the 12-15-inch seat depth range, this change can be

accomplished by repositioning the back canes on the CJ

back bracketsꢀ Refer to CHANGING SEAT DEPTH BE-

TWEEN 12-15-INCHES in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Coved

Side

Washers

Frame

If the desired change only requires aNEW seat pan, refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING SEATPAN in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

Spacers

Locknuts

If the desired change requires the removal/installation of CJ

backbrackets,refertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACK

BRACKETS in PROCEDURE 8 of this manualꢀ

Side Frame

Ifthedesiredchangerequiresanewsideframe, and/ornew

center frame, perform the following steps:

Center

Frame

Aꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in SEATFRAME

REMOVING/INSTALLINGPREPARATIONSFOR

STANDARDFRAME,ADJUSTABLEFRAME,AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Support Brackets

NOTE: Note the mounting hole position of the side

frameforproperinstallationoftheNEWsideframeꢀ

FIGURE 3- CHANGING SEAT DEPTH - ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME

Bꢀ Removethetwo(2)mountingscrews,covedwash-

ers,spacers,andlocknutsthatsecurethesideframe

to the center frameꢀ

Changing Seat Depth Between 12 and 15-

Inches (FIGURE 4)

Cꢀ Remove the side frame from the center frameꢀ

Dꢀ Repeat STEPS A and B for opposite side frameꢀ

NOTE: There are two (2) sizes of CJ back bracketsꢀ Refer

tothefollowingcharttodetermineiftheseatdepthrequired

is obtainable by repositioning the back canes only, or if the

CJ back brackets must be replacedꢀ

If the desired seat depth requires a new center

frame, determined in STEPS 1-5 perform STEPS

E - G, otherwise proceed to STEP Hꢀ

CJ BACK BRACKET (SEAT DEPTH) RANGES

12 and 13-inches

14 and 15-inches

Eꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure

the EXISTING center frame to support bracketsꢀ

If seat depth required is within seat depth range of

the original CJ back brackets, only the back canes

need to be repositioned7 Refer to the following pro-

cedure7

Fꢀ Remove existing center frame from seat mount

platesꢀ

Gꢀ SecureNEWcenterframetosupportbracketswith

the existing four (4) mounting screws and locknutsꢀ

Torqueto156-inchpoundsꢀ

If the seat depth required is NOT within the seat depth

range of the original CJ back brackets, the CJ back

brackets must be replaced before repositioning the

back canes7 Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING CJ

BACK BRACKETS in PROCEDURE 8 of this manual7

Hꢀ Secure NEW side frame to the center frame at the

positionnotedpreviouslyꢀTorqueto75-inchpoundsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

1ꢀ Remove the armrests from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to IN- 11ꢀ Reinstall the armrests onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REMOVING FLIP BACK ARMRESTS in

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

STALLING/REMOVING FLIP BACK ARMRESTS in

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

2ꢀ Cutthetiewrapsthatsecurethebackupholsterytothe

CJ back bracketsꢀ

CHANGING SEAT WIDTH

(STANDARD AND ADJ USTABLE

SEAT FRAME)

3ꢀ Pull the bottom of the back upholstery away from the

rear of the seat panꢀ

4ꢀ Remove mounting screw, washer and coved washer

from the top mounting hole of the CJ back bracket and

back caneꢀ

Standard Seat Fram e

NOTE:Ifchangingseatwidthbelow16-incheswide,youmust

convert to an adjustable seat frameꢀ Refer to CONVERT-

ING FROM STANDARD TO ADJUSTABLE SEAT

FRAME OR VICE VERSA in this procedure of the manualꢀ

For all changes above 16-inches wide, perform the outlined

stepsꢀ

NOTE: Before removing the back canes from the CJ back

brackets, note the BACK ANGLE for reinstallationꢀ

NOTE:Toavoidlosingtheinsertineachbackcane, lineup

the holes in the insert with the holes in the back cane and

start one of the screws through the cane from the inside of

the wheelchair to hold the insert in placeꢀ

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washer and coved

washer from the bottom mounting hole of the CJ back

bracket and the back caneꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the existing standard seat frame subassem-

bly and install the NEW standard frameꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT FRAME

SUBASSEMBLY in this procedure of the manualꢀ

6ꢀ Reposition the back cane to the desired seat depth

and angleꢀ If changing the back angle as well, refer to

BACK ANGLE ADJUSTMENT in PROCEDURE 8 of

this manualꢀ

3ꢀ FOR 12-15-INCH SEAT DEPTHS ONLY: Remove

the CJ back brackets from the existing standard seat

frame and install onto the NEW standard seat frameꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACKBRACK-

ETS in PROCEDURE 8 of this manualꢀ

7ꢀ Secure bottom of the back upholstery to the seat panꢀ

8ꢀ Secure the bottom of the back upholstery to the CJ

back brackets with new tie wrapsꢀ

9ꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque the mounting screws to

75-inch poundsꢀ

4ꢀ Reinstall the components previously removed in STEP

1ꢀPerformtheinstructionsoutlinedinPREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

10ꢀ Repeat the STEPS 1-9 for the opposite back caneꢀ

Back Cane

Adjustable Seat Fram e (FIGURE 5)

Coved

Washers

NOTE: If changing seat width above 16-inches wide, you

mustconverttoastandardseatframeꢀRefertoCONVERT-

ING FROM STANDARD TO ADJUSTABLE SEAT

FRAME OR VICE VERSA in this procedure of the manualꢀ

For all changes below 16-inches wide, perform the outlined

stepsꢀ

CJ Back

Threaded

Bracket

Insert

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT) inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Seat

Frame

Washers

2ꢀ Review the following chart for the allowable seat width

and seat depth combinations for the adjustable seat

frameꢀ

Mounting Screws (Torque to 75-inch pounds)

FIGURE 4 - ADJUSTING SEAT DEPTH - CHANGING

SEAT DEPTH BETWEEN 12 AND 15-INCHES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT FRAME

PROCEDURE 6

ALLOWABLE SEAT WIDTH AND DEPTH

COMBINATIONS FOR ADJUSTABLE SEAT FRAME

Bꢀ Forallotherchangesregardingseatframechanges,

refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

SEAT WIDTH

✪

N/A

✪

DETAIL “A”

12-inches

13-inches

14-inches

15-inches

16-inches

✪

N/A

STEPS 3-6

Coved

Washers

Side Frame

Mounting

Screws

NOTE: The seat widths and seat depths enclosed in the

outlined box will require the use of CJ back brackets and a

17-inch deep seat panꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, coved washers,

spacers, and locknuts that secure the side frame to the

center frameꢀ

4ꢀ Adjust side frame to desired width determined from

STEP 2ꢀ See DETAIL “A” for proper mounting hole

positionꢀ

Spacers

Locknut

Side

Frame

Center

Frame

5ꢀ Secure side frame to center frame with existing mount-

ing screws, coved washers, spacers, and locknutsꢀ

Torque mounting screws to 75-inch poundsꢀ

FIGURE 5 -CHANGING SEAT WIDTH - ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME

WARNING

INSTALLING/ REMOVING

ADJ USTABLE SEAT FRAME

SUBASSEMBLY AND/ OR

COMPONENT REPLACEMENT

(FIGURE 6)

Both sid e fra m e s MUST b e a d juste d to the

sa m e m ounting hole p osition to m a inta in

p rop e r we ig ht b a la nc e of use r a nd se a t

fra m e . If we ig ht is not b a la nc e d , injury to

the a ssista nt a nd / or use r a nd d a m a g e to

the whe e lc ha ir m a y re sult.

Converting from Adjustable Seat Fram e to

Standard Seat Fram e or Captains Van Seat

6ꢀ Repeat STEPS 3-5 for opposite side frameꢀ

7ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

NOTE: This section must be performed in conjunction with

a starting procedureꢀ

Aꢀ For adjusting the seat width only, perform the in-

structions outlined in PREPARATIONS FOR RE-

MOVING/INSTALLING SEAT FRAME (STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT) in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

two (2) support brackets of the adjustable seat frame

subassembly to the seat mounting platesꢀ

2ꢀ To complete conversion, refer back to the starting pro-

cedure to complete the desired changeꢀ

NOTE: When performing the steps outlined in

PREPARATIONS FOR REMOVING/INSTALL-

ING SEAT FRAME (STANDARD FRAME, AD-

JUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAPTAINS VAN

SEAT) the seat pan, seat cushion, back uphol-

stery and spreader bar (if applicable), will need to

be replacedꢀ Spreader bars are only required on

seat depths greater than 19-inchesꢀ

Converting from Standard Seat Fram e or

Captains Van Seat To Adjustable Seat Fram e

NOTE: This section must be performed in conjunction with

a starting procedureꢀ

NOTE: When converting the seat frame, you will need a

seat pan, seat cushion, back upholstery and spreader bar (if

applicable)ꢀ Spreader bars are only required on seat depths

of greater than 19-inchesꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

1ꢀ Securebothsupportbracketstotheseatmountingplates

with four (4) mounting screws and locknuts as shown in

FIGURE6ꢀTorquemountingscrewsto156-inchpoundsꢀ

Com ponent Replacem ent

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

2ꢀ Secure the center frame to the support brackets with

four(4)mountingscrews,locknuts,andspacersꢀTorque

to 156-inch poundsꢀ

NOTE: Note the mounting hole position of the current side

frame(s) for proper installation of the NEW side frame(s)%

3ꢀ Insert the side frame into the center frame and secure

with mounting screw, coved spacer, spacer, and lock-

nutꢀTorqueto75-inchpoundsꢀRepeatforoppositeside

frameꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, coved spacers,

spacers, and locknuts that secure the side frame to the

center frameꢀ

4ꢀ Tocompleteconversion,referbacktothestartingproce-

dure to complete the desired changeꢀ

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-inch pounds)

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-inch pounds)

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 75-inch

pounds)

Side Frame

Coved Washer

Center Frame

Spacer

Side Frame

Locknuts

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-inch

pounds)

Support

Bracket

Support

Bracket

Mounting Screws

(Torque to 156-inch

pounds)

Locknuts

Mounting

Plate

Base

Frame

Locknuts

FIGURE 6 - INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE SEAT FRAME SUBASSEMBLY AND/OR COMPONENT

REPLACEMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT FRAME

PROCEDURE 6

3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ If center frame needs replaced, repeat STEP 2 for

opposite side frame and proceed to STEP 4ꢀ

Captains Van

Seat

Bꢀ Ifoppositesideframeneedsreplaced,repeatSTEP

2, then proceed to STEP 6ꢀ Otherwise proceed to

STEP 6ꢀ

4ꢀ Removethefour(4)mountingscrewsandlocknutsthat

secure the center frame to the support bracketsꢀ

Seat Mounting

Plate

5ꢀ Secure NEW center frame to support brackets with ex-

isting four (4) mounting screws and locknutsꢀ Torque to

156-inch poundsꢀ

Mounting

Screws

(Torque to 156-

inch pounds)

WARNING

Base Frame

Both sid e fra m e s MUST b e a d juste d to the

sa m e m ounting hole p osition to m a inta in

p rop e r we ig ht b a la nc e of use r a nd se a t

fra m e . If we ig ht is not b a la nc e d , injury to

the a ssista nt a nd / or use r a nd d a m a g e to

the whe e lc ha ir m a y re sult.

Seat

Mounting

Plate

Locknuts

6ꢀ Install new/existing side frame(s) into new/existing cen-

terframeatthemountingpositionpreviouslynotedꢀTorque

to 75-inch poundsꢀ

FIGURE 7 - REMOVING/INSTALLING CAPTAINS VAN

SEAT ASSEMBLY

7ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

REPLACING CAPTAINS VAN SEAT

AND/ OR CAPTAINS VAN SEAT

FRAME (FIGURE 8)

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

INSTALLING/ REMOVING CAPTAINS

VAN SEAT ASSEMBLY (FIGURE 7)

NOTE:Thisprocedureistobeperformedinconjunctionwith

a starting procedure% Proceed to the section that reflects the

desired change%

2ꢀ Removethecaptainsvanseatassemblyfromthewheel-

chairꢀ Refer to INSTALLING /REMOVING CAPTAINS

VANSEATASSEMBLYinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Installing Captains Van Seat

1ꢀ Positionthecaptainsvanseatontheseatmountingplates

at the position shown in FIGURE 7ꢀ

Captains

Van Seat

2ꢀ Line up mounting holes in the captains van seat frame

and the mounting holes in the seat mounting platesꢀ

3ꢀ Securethecaptainsvanseattotheseatmountingplates

with four (4) mounting screws, and locknutsꢀ Torque to

156-inch poundsꢀ

Captains

Van Seat

Frame

4ꢀ Refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

Washer

Rem oving Captains Van Seat

1ꢀ Removethefour(4)mountingscrewsandlocknutsthat

securethecaptainsvanseattotheseatmountingplatesꢀ

Mounting Screw

(Torque to 75-inch

Spacer

pounds)

2ꢀ Remove captains van seat from seat mounting platesꢀ

3ꢀ Refer back to the starting procedure to complete the

desired changeꢀ

FIGURE 8 - REPLACING CAPTAINS VAN SEAT AND/

OR CAPTAINS VAN SEAT FRAME

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

3ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws, two (2) wash- 6ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

ers, and two (2) spacers that secure the captains van

seat to the seat frameꢀ

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

4ꢀ Replace the captains van seat or the seat frameꢀ

5ꢀ Securenew/existingcaptainsvanseattothenew/exist-

ingcaptainsvanseatframewithexistingfour(4)mount-

ing screws and spacersꢀ Torque to 75- inch poundsꢀ

CONVERTING FROM ADJ USTABLE

SEAT FRAME TO CAPTAINS VAN

SEAT OR VICE VERSA

6ꢀ Install new captains van seat assembly onto the wheel-

chairꢀ RefertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINSVAN

SEATASSEMBLYin thisprocedure of the manualꢀ

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

7ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Remove the adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ

Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD

SEATFRAME SUBASSEMBLYin this procedure

of the manualꢀ

CONVERTING FROM STANDARD

SEAT FRAME TO ADJ USTABLE

SEAT FRAME OR VICE VERSA

Bꢀ Remove the captains van seatAssemblyꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEAT

ASSEMBLYinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP- 3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following sections:

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Adjust able Fram es

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Install the adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

Aꢀ Remove the existing standard seat frame subas-

semblyꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGSTAN-

DARDSEATFRAMESUBASSEMBLYinthispro-

cedure of the manualꢀ

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEATFRAME SUBASSEMBLYAND/OR COM-

PONENT REPLACEMENT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

Bꢀ Remove the adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGADJUSTABLE

SEATFRAME SUBASSEMBLYAND/OR COM-

PONENTREPLACEMENTinthisprocedureofthe

manualꢀ

Bꢀ Adjust side frames to desired seat widthꢀ Refer to

CHANGINGSEATWIDTH inthisprocedureofthe

manual for mounting hole locations and allowable

seat width/seat depth combinationsꢀ

Cꢀ 12-15-INCH SEAT DEPTHS ONLY: Install the CJ

back brackets, seat positioning strap, and quick re-

lease pin from the onto the adjustable seat frameꢀ

Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING CJ BACK

BRACKETS in PROCEDURE 8 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Install the standard frame subassemblyꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVING STANDARD SEAT

FRAME SUBASSEMBLYin this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Dꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARA-

TIONS FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT

FRAME (STANDARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE

FRAME,ANDCAPTAINSVANSEAT)inthisproce-

dure of the manualꢀ

Bꢀ Install the adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEATFRAME SUBASSEMBLYAND/OR COM-

PONENT REPLACEMENT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

4ꢀ ADJUSTABLE FRAMES ONLY:Adjust side frame to

desiredseatwidthꢀRefertoCHANGINGSEATWIDTH

in this procedure of the manual for mounting hole loca-

tionsandallowableseatwidth/seatdepthcombinationsꢀ

Capt ain s Van Seat

Aꢀ InstallthecaptainsvanseatꢀRefertoINSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

this procedure of the manualꢀ

5ꢀ STANDARDANDADJUSTABLE FRAME WITH 12-

15-INCHSEATDEPTHSONLY:RemovetheCJback

brackets from the existing standard seat frame and in-

stall onto the NEW standard seat frameꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACKBRACKETSinPRO-

CEDURE 8 of this manualꢀ

Bꢀ Adjustthecaptainsvanseattothedesiredpositionꢀ

RefertoADJUSTINGCAPTAINSVANSEATinthis

procedure of the manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

SEAT FRAME

PROCEDURE 6

3ꢀ Removethesix(6)mountingscrews,locknuts,andspac-

ers that secure the seat pan, seat positioning strap, and

quick release pin to the seat frameꢀ

Cꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARA-

TIONS FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT

FRAME (STANDARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE

FRAME,ANDCAPTAINSVANSEAT)inthisproce-

dure of the manualꢀ

NOTE: When removing seat pan, note tab position of quick

release pin to the seat positioning strap%

Installing

CONVERTING FROM STANDARD

SEAT FRAME TO CAPTAINS VAN

SEAT OR VICE VERSA

1ꢀ Position the NEW seat pan on the seat frame, aligning

the mounting holes of the seat pan and the mounting

holes of the seat frameꢀ

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

2ꢀ Position the seat positioning strap and quick release pin

tabontotheseatframeandsecurewithmountingscrew

and locknutꢀ See FIGURE 9 for proper orientationꢀ Re-

peat for other seat positioning strapꢀ

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

NOTE: Check seat positioning strap for proper length% The

widthrangeforthefour(4)seatpositioningstrapsare:12-16-

incheswide(Junior),16-19-incheswide,20-22-incheswide,

and23-24-incheswide%

Aꢀ Remove the standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ

Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD

SEATFRAME SUBASSEMBLYin this procedure

of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Reinstalltheremainingmountingscrews, locknuts, and

spacersꢀTorqueallmountingscrewsto75-inchpoundsꢀ

Bꢀ Remove the captains van seatAssemblyꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEAT

ASSEMBLYin this procedure of the manualꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the protective strips from new seat pan and

reinstall the seat cushion onto the seat panꢀ

3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

5ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ InstallthecaptainsvanseatꢀRefertoINSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

this procedure of the manualꢀ

Aꢀ When changing the seat width or depth, refer back

to that procedure to complete the desired changeꢀ

Bꢀ Install the standard seat frameꢀ Refer to REMOV-

ING/INSTALLINGSTANDARDSEATFRAMESUB-

ASSEMBLYinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Mounting

Screws

4ꢀ STANDARD FRAMES ONLY ON 12-15-INCH SEAT

DEPTHS ONLY: Install the CJ back brackets from the

onto the adjustable seat frameꢀ Refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLING CJBACKBRACKETSinPROCEDURE

8 of this manualꢀ

Seat

Pan

5ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINSVAN SEAT)inthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Seat

Positioning

Strap

6ꢀ AdjustthecaptainsvanseattothedesiredpositionꢀRe-

fertoADJUSTINGCAPTAINSVANSEATinthisproce-

dure of the manualꢀ

Spacer

Seat Frame

REMOVING/ INSTALLING SEAT PAN

(FIGURE 9)

Tab

Locknut

Rem oving

Locknut

Quick Release Pin

1ꢀ Remove the seat cushion from the seat panꢀ

NOTE: Illustration shows standard frame only for clarity%

The seat pan removes/installs onto the adjustable seat

frame the way%

2ꢀ Removetheflip-backarmrestsfromthewheelchairꢀRefer

toINSTALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARMRESTS

in PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

FIGURE 9 - REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT PAN

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 6

SEAT FRAME

Bꢀ Reinstalltheflip-backarmrestsfromthewheelchairꢀ

RefertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARM-

RESTSinPROCEDURE4oftheowner’smanual,

Cꢀ Securely tighten both mounting screwsꢀ Torque to

15-in/lbsꢀ

2ꢀ To obtain a 10^oseat dump (DETAIL “A”):

1081227ꢀ

Aꢀ Loosen the two (2) mounting screws that secure

the front of the seat frame to the seat mount plateꢀ

MOUNTING PLATE - SEAT ANGLE

ADJ USTMENT AND INSTALLATION

ORIENTATION (FIGURE 10)

Bꢀ Position the mounting screws at the bottom of the

front slotꢀ

Cꢀ Securely tighten both mounting screwsꢀTorque to

15-in/lbsꢀ

Seat Angle Adjustm ent

NOTE:Theangleoftheseatisfactorysetprovidingtheuser

with a 5^oseat dump% This angle can changed by adjusting

Installation Orientation

either the front or back of the seat mount plate to obtain any 1ꢀ MediumandHighSeatMountingPlates:Installwith

angle between 0^oor 10^oseat dump%

the angled end toward the front of the wheelchairꢀ

NOTE: There are three (3) heights of seat mounting plates; 2ꢀ Low Seat Mounting Plates: Install with the thicker

low, medium, and high% See chart below for proper settings%

1ꢀ To obtain a 0^oseat dump (DETAIL“A”):

end toward the front of the wheelchairꢀ

Rear of Seat Frame

Aꢀ Loosen the two (2) mounting screws that secure

the rear of the seat frame to the seat mount plateꢀ

Mounting

Screw

DETAIL “A”

Bꢀ Position the mounting screws at the bottom of the

rear slotꢀ

LOW

MEDIUM AND HIGH

Angled End of Seat

Mounting Plate

Thicker End

Front of Seat

Frame

Medium Height

Seat Mount Plate

Mounting Screw

SEAT DUMP

SEAT

MOUNT

PLATE

0^o

5^o

10^o

REAR OF

CHAIR

FRONT OF

CHAIR

REAR OF

CHAIR

FRONT OF REAR OF

CHAIR CHAIR

FRONT OF

CHAIR

LOW

HEIGHT

REAR OF

CHAIR

FRONT OF

CHAIR

REAR OF

CHAIR

FRONT OF REAR OF

CHAIR CHAIR

FRONT OF

CHAIR

MEDIUM

HEIGHT

FRONT

OF CHAIR

REAR OF

CHAIR

REAR OF

CHAIR

FRONT OF REAR OF

CHAIR CHAIR

FRONT OF

CHAIR

HIGH

HEIGHT

FIGURE 10 - MOUNTING PLATE - SEAT ANGLE ADJUSTMENT AND INSTALLATION ORIENTATION

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASE FRAME

PROCEDURE 7

6ꢀ Adjust seat mounting plates to desired angleꢀ Refer to

MOUNTING PLATE - SEATANGLE ADJUSTMENT

ANDINSTALLATIONORIENTATIONinPROCEDURE

6of this manualꢀ

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Replacing Seat Mounting Plates

Replacing Seat Support Brackets

7ꢀ Reverse STEP 2A, 2B or 2Cꢀ

Replacing Seat Support Bracket T-Nuts

Replacing Battery Charger Bracket and T-Nut

Removing/Installing Seat Stop Screws

8ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

WARNING

After ANY a djustments, repa ir or service a nd BE-

FORE use, ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta ching ha rdwa re

is tightened securely - otherwise injury or da m-

a ge ma y result.

Washer

Bolt Strap

Seat

Mounting

Plate

Mounting

Screws

REPLACING SEAT MOUNTING

PLATES (FIGURE 1)

Seat

Support

Bracket

NOTE: When replacing components of the wheelchair, refer

to the individual procedure for correct use of LOCTITE 242

and torque specifications or PROCEDURE 3 of this Manual(

Washer

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

Mounting

Screws

FIGURE 1 - REPLACING SEAT MOUNTING PLATES

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

REPLACING SEAT SUPPORT

BRACKETS (FIGURE 2)

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAME SUBASSEMBLY in PROCEDURE 6 of 1ꢀ PerformtheinstructionsoutlinedinPREPARATIONSFOR

this manualꢀ

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STANDARD

FRAME,ADJUSTABLE FRAME,ANDCAPTAINSVAN

SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO- 2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

NENT REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 6 of

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

this manualꢀ

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAMESUBASSEMBLYinPROCEDURE6ofthis

manualꢀ

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLY in

PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀRe-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO-

NENT REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

NOTE: Before removing seat mounting plates, note the po-

sitionofthewashers(

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, washers and

bolt strap bracket that secure the seat mounting plate to

the seat support bracketꢀ

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

4ꢀ Secure NEW seat mounting plate with existing two (2)

mounting screws, washers, and bolt straps to seat sup-

port bracket using Loctite 242 and torque to 156-inch 3ꢀ RemoveseatmountplatesꢀRefertoREPLACINGSEAT

poundsꢀ

MOUNTINGPLATESinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

5ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-2 for opposite side, if necessaryꢀ

NOTE: Note the position of the seat support brackets before

removing to ensure proper reinstallation(

NOTE: For illustrations of the three (3) different seat mount-

ing plates, refer to MOUNTING PLATE - SEAT ANGLE

ADJUSTMENT AND INSTALLATION ORIENTATION in

PROCEDURE 6 of this manual(

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 7

BASE FRAME

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO-

NENT REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

WARNING

Do not a d just the p osition of the se a t sup -

p o rt b ra c ke t in this p ro c e d ure . If a n a d -

justm e nt is d e sire d , re fe r to ADJUSTING

WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION in PROCEDURE 15 -

MWD WHEELCHAIRS, PROCEDURE 16 - RWD

WHEELCHAIRS, o r PROCEDURE 17 - FWD

WHEELCHAIRS o f this m a nua l.

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ RemovetheseatmountplatesꢀRefertoREPLACINGSEAT

MOUNTINGPLATESinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

4ꢀ Removethetwo(2)mountingscrewsandwashersthat

secure the seat support bracket to the base frameꢀ

NOTE: Before removing seat mounting plates, note the po-

sitionofthewashers(

WARNING

Whe n insta lling se a t sup p o rt b ra c ke t, e n-

sure the m o unting sc re ws a re thre a d e d

into the T-Nuts loc a te d insid e the c ha nne l

o f the b a se fra m e .

4ꢀ Remove the seat support bracketsꢀ Refer to REPLAC-

INGSEATSUPPORTBRACKETSinthisprocedureof

the manualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the seat stop screw that is closest to the end

capꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING SEATSTOP

SCREWS in this procedure of the manualꢀ

5ꢀ Secure the NEW seat support bracket to base frame

with the existing two (2) mounting screws and washersꢀ

Torqueto156-inchpoundsꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the end cap and channel coverꢀ

7ꢀ Slide existing T-Nut(s) out of channelꢀ

6ꢀ ReinstallseatmountplatesꢀRefertoREPLACINGSEAT

MOUNTINGPLATESinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

8ꢀ Insert NEW T-Nut(s) into channel in correct orientationꢀ

9ꢀ Replace channel cover and end capꢀ

7ꢀ Adjust seat mount plates to desired angleꢀ Refer to

MOUNTING PLATE - SEATANGLE ADJUSTMENT

ANDINSTALLATIONORIENTATIONinPROCEDURE

6of this manualꢀ

WARNING

The se a t stop sc re ws m ust b e in p la c e b e -

fore op e ra tion of your p owe r whe e lc ha ir.

Ensure the T-Nut(s) a re p ositione d b e twe e n

b oth se a t stop sc re ws.

8ꢀ Reverse STEP 2A, 2B or 2Cꢀ

9ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

10ꢀ Use Loctite 242and reinstall seat stop screw into base

frameꢀ

Mounting Screws

Washer

11ꢀ Reinstall the seat seat support bracketsꢀ Refer to RE-

PLACING SEAT SUPPORT BRACKETS in this pro-

cedure of the manualꢀ

Seat Support

Bracket

Channel Cover

Mounting Screw

Seat Support

Bracket

Base

T-Nut

Frame

Washer

Channel

FIGURE 2 - REPLACING SEAT SUPPORT BRACKETS

Stop

Screw

REPLACING SEAT SUPPORT

BRACKET T-NUTS (FIGURE 3)

Base

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

Frame

End Cap

T-Nut

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAME SUBASSEMBLY in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

FIGURE 3 - REPLACING SEAT SUPPORT BRACKET

T-NUTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BASE FRAME

PROCEDURE 7

12ꢀ Reinstall the seat mount platesꢀ Refer to REPLACING 8ꢀ Secure the battery charger connector to the mount

SEAT MOUNTING PLATES in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

bracket with the EXISTING two (2) mounting screwsꢀ

Tightensecurelyꢀ

13ꢀ Adjust seat mounting plates to desired angleꢀ Refer to 9ꢀ Reverse STEP 2A, 2B or 2Cꢀ

MOUNTING PLATE - SEATANGLE ADJUSTMENT

10ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

ANDINSTALLATIONORIENTATIONinPROCEDURE

6of this manualꢀ

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

14ꢀ Reverse STEP 2A, 2B or 2Cꢀ

15ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

Mounting Screw

Battery

Charger

Connector

REPLACING BATTERY CHARGER

BRACKET AND T-NUT

Mount

Bracket

T-nut

NOTE: There is no T-nut on the FWD models(

Base

Frame

RWD and MWD Models (FIGURE 4)

1ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING THE SEAT FRAME

(STANDARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this

manualꢀ

FIGURE 4 - RWD AND MWD MODELS

Arrow FWD Model (FIGURE 5)

1ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ For LOW MOUNT BRACKETS, perform

STEPS 1-11ꢀ

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAME SUBASSEMBLY in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

Bꢀ For MEDIUM/HIGH MOUNT BRACKETS per-

formSTEPS4-9ONLYꢀ

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO-

NENT REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING THE SEAT FRAME

(STANDARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this

manualꢀ

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAME SUBASSEMBLY in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the seat support bracketsꢀ Refer to RE-

PLACING SEAT SUPPORT BRACKETS in this

procedure of this manualꢀ

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO-

NENT REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 6 of

this manualꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws that secure the

battery charger connector to the mount bracketꢀ

5ꢀ Removebatterychargerconnectorfrommountbracketꢀ

6ꢀ Removethemountingscrewwhichsecuresthebattery

charger mount bracket to the T-nut located in the chan-

nel of the base frameꢀ

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer toINSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYin

PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

7ꢀ Replace battery charger mount bracket and secure to

base frame with existing mounting screwꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING FRONT SHROUD in PROCEDURE 17

of the manualꢀ

NOTE: To replace the Battery Charger Bracket T-Nut, per-

form STEPS 3-13 in REPLACING SEAT SUPPORT

BRACKET T-NUTS in this procedure of the manual(

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 7

BASE FRAME

5ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws that secure the

battery charger connector to the mount bracketꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING SEAT

STOP SCREWS (FIGURE 6)

6ꢀ Removebatterychargerconnectorfrommountbracketꢀ

NOTE: This procedure is for RWD and MWD wheel-

7ꢀ Removethemountingscrewwhichsecuresthebattery chairs ONLY(

charger mount bracket to the base frameꢀ

NOTE:Thefrontseatstopscrewshouldonlyberemoved

8ꢀ Replace the battery charger mount bracket and se-

cureittothebaseframewiththeEXISTINGmounting

screwꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

if replacing a T-nut for either the seat support bracket or

the battery charger mount bracket( The rear seat stop

screw should never be removed(

9ꢀ Secure the battery charger connector to the mount

bracket with the EXISTING two (2) mounting screwsꢀ

Tightensecurelyꢀ

1ꢀ Unthread seat stop screw from base frameꢀ

WARNING

The se a t stop sc re ws m ust b e in p la c e b e -

fo re o p e ra tio n o f yo ur p o we r whe e lc ha ir.

Ensure the se a t sup p o rt b ra c ke t is p o si

tio ne d b e twe e n b o th se a t sto p sc re ws.

10ꢀ Reverse STEP 3A, 3B or 3Cꢀ

11ꢀ Perform the instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FORREMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STAN-

DARD FRAME, ADJUSTABLE FRAME, AND CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ When reinstalling the front seat stop screw, ensure

the seat support bracket is located in-between both

seatstopscrewsꢀUseloctite242andtightensecurelyꢀ

Mounting Screw

Battery

Charger

Seat Support Bracket

Base

Connector

Frame

Rear Seat

Mounting

Screw

Stop Screw

Front Seat Stop Screw

FIGURE 6 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING SEAT

STOP SCREWS

Battery

Charger

Mount

Bracket

Base Frame

FIGURE 5 - ARROW FWD MODEL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BACK FRAME

PROCEDURE 8

NOTE: Ensure the CJ back bracket is mounted in the front

holes of the back angle plates as shown in DETAIL “A”(

This Procedure includes the following:

Removing/Installing CJ Back Brackets

Changing Back Height

WARNING

Alwa ys we a r your se a t p ositioning stra p .

Back Angle Adjustment

3ꢀ Position the seat positioning strap and quick release pin

under the CJ back bracketꢀ

WARNING

Afte r ANY a d justm e nts, re p a ir o r se rvic e

a nd BEFORE use , ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta c h-

ing ha rd wa re is tig hte ne d se c ure ly - o th-

e rwise injury or d a m a g e m a y re sult.

4ꢀ Securethequickreleasepin,seatpositioningstrap,and

CJ back bracket to the seat frameꢀ Torque to 75-inch

poundsꢀ

5ꢀ Install washers and locknuts onto the threaded studs of

the CJ back bracketꢀTorque to 75-inch poundsꢀ

NOTE: The procedures in this section of the manual refer

to NON-RECLINER seat frames only( For recliner seat

frames, refer to PROCEDURE 14 of this manual(

6ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ For replacing CJ back brackets only, perform the

instructionsoutlinedinPREPARATIONSFORRE-

MOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STANDARD

FRAME,ADJUSTABLE FRAME,ANDCAPTAINS

VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manualꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING CJ BACK

BRACKETS (FIGURE 1)

Bꢀ For all other seat frame changes, refer back to the

startingproceduretocompletethedesiredchangeꢀ

NOTE:ThefollowingprocedureisforJr(wheelchairsonly(

NOTE:Thisprocedureistobeperformedinconjunctionwith

a starting procedure except when replacement of CJ back

brackets is desired(

CJ Bracket

mounts in

Rem oving CJ Back Brackets

Front Holes on

Back Angle

DETAIL “A”

1ꢀ Ifnecessary,performtheinstructionsoutlinedinPREPA-

RATIONS FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT

FRAME(STANDARDFRAME,ADJUSTABLE FRAME,

ANDCAPTAINSVANSEAT)inPROCEDURE6ofthis

manualꢀ

Plates.

Toward Front of

Wheelchair

Seat

Positioning

Strap

CJ Back

Bracket

Back

Angle

Plate

Mounting

Screw

2ꢀ Remove the locknuts and washers that secure the CJ

back bracket to the back angle plateꢀ

Threaded

Studs

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and locknut that secures

the quick release pin and CJ back bracket and seat po-

sitioning strap to the seat frameꢀ

Washers

4ꢀ Remove the existing CJ back bracketꢀ

5ꢀ Repeat STEPS 2-4 for the opposite CJ back bracketꢀ

6ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ For replacement of CJ back brackets, proceed to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGCJBACKBRACKETS

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Quick

Release

Bꢀ For all other seat frame changes, refer back to the

startingproceduretocompletethedesiredchangeꢀ

Locknuts

Installing CJ Back Brackets

Locknut

1ꢀ Ifnecessary,performtheinstructionsoutlinedinPREPA-

RATIONS FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT

FRAME(STANDARDFRAME,ADJUSTABLE FRAME,

ANDCAPTAINSVANSEAT)inPROCEDURE6ofthis

manualꢀ

Seat

Pan

Seat Frame

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/INSTALLING CJ BACK

BRACKETS

2ꢀ InstallthethreadedstudsoftheCJbackbracketthrough

the back angle plates as shown in FIGURE 1ꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 8

BACK FRAME

NOTE: If needing a reference for proper mounting holes

forthebackanglerequired, orifchangingtheoriginalback

angle, refer to BACK ANGLE ADJUSTMENT in this pro-

cedure of the manual(

CHANGING BACK HEIGHT

(FIGURE 2)

NOTE: If changing the back height, new back upholstery

may be needed as well( Refer to the following chart to deter-

mine if new back upholstery is needed:

WARNING

The b a c k c a ne s MUST b e fa ste ne d se -

c ure ly to the se a t fra m e BEFORE using the

whe e lc ha ir. To rq ue to 75-inc h p o und s.

BACK UPHOLSTERY HEIGHT RANGES

16-17-INCHES

18-19-INCHES

20-INCHES

21-22-INCHES

23-24-INCHES

13ꢀ Securethetwo(2)NEWbackcanestotheseatframe

with the existing four (4) mounting screws, washers,

spacers, and locknutsꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque to

75-inch poundsꢀ

If back height required is within the range of the origi-

nal back height, only new back canes will be needed4

14ꢀ Secure the top of the existing/new back upholstery to

the back canes with the two (2) existing mounting

screws and washersꢀ

If the back height required is NOT within the range of

the original back height, new back upholstery, as well

as new back canes will be needed4

15ꢀ Secure bottom of the existing/NEW back upholstery

to rear of the seat panꢀ

NOTE: Existing hardware and inserts will be reused(

16ꢀ Secure the bottom of the existing/NEW back uphol-

1ꢀ Remove the armrests from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REMOVING FLIP BACK ARMRESTS in

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

stery to the back canes with new tie-wrapsꢀ

NOTE:CleanupholsterywithwarmDAMPclothandmild

detergent to remove superficial soil(

NOTE:Notethecorrectmountingscrewmountingpositions

to ensure the proper back angle for reinstallation(

WARNING

La und e ring o r m o isture will re d uc e fla m e

re ta rd a nc y o f the up ho lste ry.

2ꢀ Removethetwo(2)mountingscrewsandwashersthat

secure the existing back upholstery to the back canesꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws, washers, spac-

ers, and locknuts that secure the existing back canes to

the seat frameꢀ

NOTE: When replacing the back upholstery, back as-

sembly or changing back height, follow these guidelines

for spreader bar height (where applicable):

4ꢀ Remove the inserts from the existing back canesꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the back assembly from the wheelchairꢀ

BACK HEIGHT

u SPREADER BAR

HEIGHT

6ꢀ If applicable, loosen, but do not remove the mounting

screwsandlocknutsthatsecurethespreaderbartothe

existing back canesꢀ

16-inches*

17-inches*

5-inches

18-19-inches*

20-24inches

7-inches

7ꢀ Remove existing back canes from the back assemblyꢀ

8ꢀ SlidetheinsertsintothebottomoftheNEWbackcanesꢀ

NOTE: Spreader Bar required on back heights 20-24-

inches( *Spreader bar ONLY required on these back

heightsifthewidthordepthofthechairexceeds19-inches(

9ꢀ Lineupthemountingholesoftheinsertswiththemount-

ing holes in the back canesꢀ

NOTE: Tokeeptheinserts lined up for reinstallation onto the

wheelchair, start one (1) of the mounting screws through the uHeightofSpreaderBarfromBottomofBackCanes

back cane from inside of the wheelchair to hold the insert in

place(

to Top of Spreader Bar Clamp4

HEAVY DUTY MODELS

NOTE: Spreader bar required on all Heavy Duty models(

10ꢀ Slide the NEW back canes through the existing/NEW

back upholstery and spreader barꢀ

BACK HEIGHT

u SPREADER BAR

HEIGHT

11ꢀ If applicable, loosely tighten the mounting screws that

secure the spreader bar to the NEW back canesꢀ

16-17-inches

18-24-inches

5-inches

7-inches

12ꢀ Line up the mounting holes in the back canes with the

mounting holes in the seat frameꢀ

uHeight of Spreader Bar from Bottom of Back

Canes to Top of Spreader Bar Clamp4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BACK FRAME

PROCEDURE 8

17ꢀ If necessary, reposition the spreader bar at the cor- 18ꢀ Reinstall the armrest onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

rect height for the corresponding back height and

torque the mounting hardware to 60-inch poundsꢀ

INSTALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARMRESTS

in PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

Spacers

(STEPS 3, 13)

Locknuts

(STEPS 3, 13)

Back Cane

(STEPS 3, 10)

Mounting

Screw

(STEPS 2, 14)

Washer

(STEPS 2, 14)

Back

Upholstery

Locknut

(STEPS 6,11)

Spreader Bar

(STEPS 6,17)

Locknut

(STEPS 6,11)

Mounting Screw

Torque to 60 in/lbs

(STEPS 6,11)

Mounting

Screw

(STEPS 6,11)

Mounting Screws

(STEPS 3, 13)

Washers

(STEPS 3, 13)

Insert

(STEPS 4,8)

Mounting Screws

Torque to 75 in/lbs

(STEPS 3, 13)

Washers

(STEPS 3, 13)

Seat Frame

FIGURE 2 - CHANGING BACK HEIGHT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 8

BACK FRAME

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and washer from the

bottom mounting hole of the back angle plate and

back caneꢀ

BACK ANGLE ADJ USTMENT

(FIGURE 3)

1ꢀ Remove armrests from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGFLIPBACKARMRESTSin

PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

4ꢀ Reposition the back canes into the correct mount-

ing holes of the back angle plate to obtain a back

angle between 80^oand 100^oin 5^oincrementsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and washer from the top

5ꢀ Torque mounting screws to 75-inch poundsꢀ

mounting hole of back angle plate and back caneꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the armrests onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer

to INSTALLING/REMOVING FLIP BACK ARM-

RESTS in PROCEDURE 4 of the owner’s manual,

1081227ꢀ

NOTE:Toavoidlosingtheinsertineachbackcane, thread

the mounting screw through the cane from the inside of

wheelchair to hold the insert in place-

TO ACHIEVE A BACK ANGLE OF:

ANGLE

BACK CANE MOUNTING HOLE

BACK ANGLE PLATE HOLE

80^O

Top

TOP Front

Bottom

BOTTOM Rear

85^O

Top

TOP Front

2nd from Bottom

BOTTOM Center

90^O

Top

TOP Front

Bottom

BOTTOM Front

95^O

Top

TOP Center

2nd from Bottom

BOTTOM Front

100^O

Top

TOP Rear

Bottom

BOTTOM Front

FIGURE 3 - BACK ANGLE ADJUSTMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BATTERIES

PROCEDURE 9

NOTE: If there is battery acid in the bottom or on the sides of

thebatterybox(es)orbattery(ies),applybakingsodatothese

areas to neutralize the battery acid- Before reinstalling the

NEWorexistingbattery(ies), cleanthebakingsodafromthe

battery box(es) or battery(ies)-

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Installing/Removing Batteries Into/From Battery

Box(es)

Connecting Battery Cables

When to Charge Batteries

Charging Batteries

Replacing Batteries

Installing/Removing Group 24 Battery Boxes

Installing/Removing Group 22NF Battery Boxes

NOTE: When securing battery lifting strap to battery, ob-

serve polarity markings located on the ends of the battery

liftingstrap, (+)sidetoPOSITIVE(+)batterypostand(-)side

to NEGATIVE (-) battery post-

1ꢀ If necessary, remove the battery boxes from the wheel-

chairꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOVING BATTERY

BOXES - GROUP 24 BATTERY BASE FRAMES in

this procedure of the manualꢀ

WARNING

Ma ke sure power to the wheelcha ir is OFF before

performing this procedure.

The use of rub b e r g love s a nd c he m ic a l

g og g le s or fa c e shie ld s is re c om m e nd e d

whe n working with b a tte rie s.

2ꢀ Secure battery lifting strap to battery terminal(s)/post(s)

(FIGURE1)ꢀ

Inva ca re strongly recommends tha t ba ttery insta l-

la tion a nd ba ttery repla cement ALWAYS be done

by a qua lified technicia n.

CAUTION

Some ba ttery ma nufa cturers mold a ca rrying stra p

a nd/or hold down fla nges directly into the ba t-

tery ca se. Ba tteries which interfere with the ba t-

tery box ca nnot be used for these a pplica tions.

Attempting to “wedge” a ba ttery into a ba ttery

box ma y da ma ge the box a nd/or the ba ttery.

After ANY a djustments, repa ir or service a nd BE-

FORE use, ma ke sure a ll a tta ching ha rdwa re is

tightened securely - otherwise injury or da ma ge

ma y result.

3ꢀ Place batteries into battery box bottomꢀ

INSTALLING/ REMOVING

BATTERIES INTO/ FROM BATTERY

BOXES (FIGURE 1)

NOTE: To remove the battery(ies) from the battery box(es),

reversethefollowingprocedure-

Battery

Lifting

Strap

Molded Carrying Straps (Must be

removed before installation)

NOTE: Have the following tools available:

TOOL

QTY

COMMENTS

Battery Lifting Strap

1/2-inch (6 pt) Box Wrench

Supplied

Not Supplied

WARNING

ALWAYS use a ba ttery lifting stra p when lifting a ba t-

tery. It is the most convenient method a nd a ssures

tha t the ba ttery a cid will not spill. It a lso helps to

prolong the life of the ba ttery.

DO NOT tip the ba tteries. Keep the ba tteries in a n

upright position.

Group 24

Battery Box Bottom

Pla c e the whe e lc ha ir in a we ll ve ntila te d a re a

whe re work c a n be pe rforme d without risking

da ma ge to ca rpeting or floor covering.

Group 22NF

Battery Box

Bottom

The wa rra nty a nd performa nce specifica tionscon-

ta ined in this ma nua l a re ba sed on the use of deep

c yc le ge l c e ll or se a le d le a d a c id ba tte rie s.

Inva ca re strongly recommends their use a s the

power source for this unit.

FIGURE 1 - INSTALLING/REMOVING BATTERIES

INTO/FROM BATTERY BOXES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 9

BATTERIES

CONNECTING BATTERY CABLES

(FIGURE 2)

3ꢀ ConnectNEGATIVE ^Nbatterycable clamptoNEGA-

TIVE(-) battery post and connect POSITIVE ^Pbattery

cableclamptoPOSITIVE(+)batterypost(DETAIL“A”)ꢀ

WARNING

NEVER a llow a ny of your tools a nd/or ba tte ry

ca ble(s) to conta ct BOTH ba ttery post(s) a t the

sa me time. An electrica l short ma y occur a nd se-

rious persona l injury or da ma ge ma y occur.

4ꢀ Securethebatterycableclamp(s)tothebatterypost(s)

with provided hex screws and nutsꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

5ꢀ Verify battery cable clamps(s) are correctly installed

and securely tightenedꢀ

The use of rub b e r g love s a nd c he m ic a l

g og g le s or fa c e shie ld s is re c om m e nd e d

whe n working with b a tte rie s.

6ꢀ Reposition battery clamp covers over battery post(s)ꢀ

7ꢀ Install the battery box top(s)ꢀ

Whe n tig hte ning the c la m p s, a lwa ys use a

b ox wre nc h. Plie rs will “round off” the nuts.

NEVER wiggle the ba tte ry te rmina l(s)/ post(s)

whe n tig hte ning . The b a tte ry m a y b e c om e

d a m a g e d .

9ꢀ Install the battery box(es) into the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERYBOX(ES)inthis

procedure of this manualꢀ

NOTE:NewBattery(ies)MUSTbefullychargedBEFORE

using, otherwise the life of the battery(ies) will be reduced-

The POSITIVE (+) RED ba tte ry c a ble MUST c on-

ne c t to the POSITIVE (+) ba tte ry te rmina l(s)/

post(s), othe rwise se rious da ma ge will oc c ur

to the e le c tric a l syste m.

10ꢀ Ifnecessary,chargethebattery(ies)ꢀRefertoCHARG-

ING BATTERIES in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Group 24 Batteries

NOTE: Perform this procedure on one (1) battery and bat-

tery box at a time- Repeat procedure for other battery box-

1ꢀ Position battery box top next to battery box bottom as

shown in FIGURE 2ꢀ

2ꢀ Peelbackbatteryclampcoverstoexposebatteryclamp

on each battery cable as follows:

Aꢀ REDbatteryclampcoverfromREDbatterycableꢀ

Bꢀ BLACK battery clamp cover from BLACK battery

cableꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BATTERIES

PROCEDURE 9

DETAIL “A”

NEGATIVE

(-)

Battery

Terminal/

Post

POSITIVE

(+)

Battery

Terminal/

Post

Battery

Battery Box Bottom

TWO (2) CONNECTOR BATTERY BOX

RED POSITIVE (+)

ONE (1) CONNECTOR BATTERY BOX

Black NEGA-

TIVE (-)

Battery Cable

BLACK

Battery

One (1) Connector

Battery Cable

Two (2) Connector

Battery Box Top

Clamp

Cover

Battery Box Top

RED POSI-

TIVE (+)

Battery

Black

NEGATIVE (-)

Battery

BLACK

NEGATIVE (-)

Battery

Black NEGA-

TIVE (-)

Battery Cable

Clamp

Cable

Clamp

Cable

RED

Battery

Clamp

Cover

RED

Battery

Clamp

Cover

RED

POSITIVE (+)

Battery

NEGATIVE (-)

Battery Termi-

nal/Post

Cable Clamp

POSITIVE (+)

Battery Terminal/Post

NEGATIVE (-)

Battery

Terminal/Post

Battery Box

Bottom

Red POSI-

TIVE (+)

Battery Cable

Clamp

POSITIVE (+)

Battery

Terminal/Post

Battery Box

Bottom

FIGURE 2 - CONNECTING BATTERY CABLE(S) - GROUP 24 BATTERIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 9

BATTERIES

Group 22 Battery Base Fram es (FIGURE 3)

5ꢀ Position battery box top right side up and rotate

outward toward right to expose POSITIVE (+) bat-

tery terminal/post of front batteryꢀ

NOTE:RefertoWARNINGSandCAUTIONS inthe front

of this procedure-

6ꢀ Connect POSITIVE (+) RED battery cable on battery

box top to POSITIVE (+) battery terminal/post of front

batteryꢀ

NOTE: Note polarity of white battery cable (jumper)

battery terminal ends-

7ꢀ Replace battery terminal cap(s) onto battery cable

terminal end(s)ꢀ

1ꢀ Remove battery terminal cap(s) from battery

terminal(s) endsꢀ Refer to DETAIL “A” in FIGURE

3ꢀ

8ꢀ Rotate top toward left into positionꢀ Secure in placeꢀ

2ꢀ Connect WHITE battery cable (jumper) NEGATIVE

9ꢀ Install the battery box into the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

INSTALLING/REMOVING 22NF BATTERYBOX in

the Owner’s Manual supplied with the chairꢀ

terminal end to NEGATIVE (-) battery terminal/

post of front battery and connect POSITIVE ter-

minal end to POSITIVE (+) battery terminal/post of

rear batteryꢀ

NOTE: New Battery(ies) MUST be fully charged BE-

FORE using, otherwise the life of the battery(ies) will

be reduced-

3ꢀ Place battery top upside down on top of rear bat-

teryꢀ

10ꢀ If necessary, charge the battery(ies)ꢀ Refer to

CHARGING BATTERIES in the Owner’s Manual

supplied with the wheelchairꢀ

4ꢀ Connect NEGATIVE (-) BLACK battery cable of

the battery box top to NEGATIVE (-) battery termi-

nal/post of rear batteryꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 9

BATTERIES

STEPS 3 AND 4

Battery

Box Bottom

Front

Battery

FRONT

NEGATIVE (-)

Battery

Terminal/Post

Rear

Battery

NEGATIVE (-)

BLACK Battery

Cable

STEP 2

Front

Battery

FRONT

Single

Battery

Box

Battery

Box Top

(Under Side

shown)

POSITIVE (+)

REDBattery

Cable

WHITE Bat-

tery Cable

(Jumper)

Bottom

Rear

Battery

REAR

Fuse

Block

STEPS 5 AND 6

POSITIVE (+) RED Battery Cable

POSITIVE (+)

Battery

Terminal/Post

DETAIL “A”

Terminal Cap

Front

Battery

Rear

Battery

Box Top

Battery Box Bottom

NOTE: Battery box top cut away for clarification pur-

poses only-

Terminal End

FIGURE 3 - CONNECTING BATTERY CABLES - SINGLE 22NF BATTERY BOX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 9

BATTERIES

WHEN TO CHARGE BATTERIES

(FIGURE 6)

CHARGING BATTERIES (FIGURE 7)

NOTE: New batteries MUST be fully charged prior to initial

useofthewheelchair%

The Battery Discharge Indicator (BDI) is a bar graph dis-

play located on the MKIV joystickꢀ It will keep you informed

as to power availabilityꢀAvisual warning is given before the

power becomes too low to operate the wheelchairꢀ At full

chargethetwo(2)LEFTsegmentsandthefarthestRIGHT

segment of the bar graph will be illuminatedꢀ As the battery

becomesdischarged,thefarthestRIGHTsegmentwillpro-

gressively move to the LEFT until only the last two (2) bars

(LEFT) are illuminatedꢀ At this level the last two (2) bars

(LEFT) will start to Flash ON and OFF to indicate that the

end user should charge the batteries as soon as possibleꢀ

WARNING

Ne ve r a tte m p t to re c ha rg e the b a tte rie s

b y a tta c hing c a b le s d ire c tly to the b a t-

te ry te rm ina ls o r c la m p s. Alwa ys use the

re c ha rg ing p lug loc a te d on the sid e of the

whe e lc ha ir fra m e .

DO NOT a tte m p t to re c ha rg e the b a tte r-

ie s a nd o p e ra te the p o we r whe e lc ha ir a t

the sa m e tim e .

During use a nd c ha rg ing , unse a le d b a t-

te rie s will ve nt hyd rog e n g a s whic h is e x-

p losive in the rig ht c onc e ntra tion with a ir.

C AUTIO N

Alwa ys c ha rg e ne w b a tte rie s b e fo re ini-

tia l use o r b a tte ry life will b e re d uc e d .

NOTE: As a general rule, batteries should be recharged

daily to assure the longest possible life and minimize

the required charging time% Plan to recharge the bat-

teries when it is anticipated the wheelchair will not be

used for a long period of time%

Battery Discharge

Indicator (BDI) (in LCD

Readout)

Battery Discharge

Indicator (BDI)

MKIV- A JOYSTICK

MKIV- A+ JOYSTICK

The range per battery charge using recommended batter-

ies should be approximately 5 to 9 hours of typical opera-

tionꢀ Extensive use on inclines may substantially reduce

per charge mileageꢀ

Battery Discharge

Indicator (BDI)

Description and Use of Battery Chargers

The charger automatically reduces the charge from an ini-

tiallyhighratetoazeroreadingatafullychargedconditionꢀ

Ifleftunattended, thechargershouldautomaticallyshut-off

when full charge is obtainedꢀ

MKIV- X JOYSTICK

FIGURE 6 - WHEN TO CHARGE BATTERIES

There are some basic concepts which will help you

understand this automatic processꢀ They are:

The amount of electrical current drawn within a given time

to charge a battery is called the “charge rate”ꢀ If, due to

usage, the charge stored in the battery is low, the charge

rate is high, as indicated by the green light on the chargerꢀ

Initially, thegreenlightwillstayilluminatedforashortperiod

of time followed by a longer period of off timeꢀ As a charge

buildsup,thechargerateisreduced,andthegreenlightwill

stay illuminated for a longer period of time followed by a

shorter off timeꢀ

WARNING

If the c ha rge r c irc uit bre a ke r is tripping ON

a nd OFF, unp lug the c ha rg e r a nd c onta c t

Inva c a re Te c hnic a l Se rvic e s, 1-800-832-4707.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BATTERIES

PROCEDURE 9

RWD/ MWD MODELS

NOTE:Ifperformingthechargingproceduresindependently,

READ and CAREFULLY follow the individual instructions

for each charger (supplied or purchased)%

Battery Charger Connector

Charger Cable

From Battery Charger

NOTE: If charging instructions are not supplied, consult a

qualified service technician for proper procedures%

Three (3)

Pronged Plug

Required Item s:

TOOL

Battery Charger

uExtension Cord

QUANTITY COMMENTS

Top View

of Wheelchair

Supplied

Not Supplied

u (3-prongplug,15amperecurrentrating; industrialtype)

Battery Boxes

Battery Charger

1ꢀ Attachthebatterychargerconnectortothechargercable/

battery harnessꢀ

Battery Charger Mount Bracket

Base Frame

NOTE: The battery charger connector is factory installed on

the RIGHT side of the wheelchair% It can be positioned on

either side of the wheelchair for user convenience%

From

Battery

Charger

NOTE FOR RECLINERS ONLY: If the wheelchair is a re-

cliner,thebatterychargerconnectoraswellasthelimitswitch,

are factory set on the RIGHT side of the wheelchair% How-

ever, they can be positioned on either side for user conve-

nience% The limit switch MUST BE positioned on the same

side as the battery charger connector%

ARROW FWD MODEL

2ꢀ Plugthecharger’sACpowercord, orextension, intothe

grounded120VACwalloutletꢀ

REAR OF

WHEELCHAIR

3ꢀ Wait until charging is completeꢀ

Battery Charger

Mount Bracket

and Connector

NOTE: Shrouds and drive wheels not shown for

clarification purposes only%

FIGURE 7 - CHARGING BATTERIES

NOTE: Allow eight (8) hours for normal charging% Larger

batteries (greater than 55 ampere-hours) or severely dis-

charged batteries may require up to sixteen (16) hours to

be properly charged and equalized% If charger operates

for sixteen (16) hours and is unable to fully charge the

batteries, an internal timer turns the charger off and be-

gins to fast blink the green light%

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 9

BATTERIES

It is advantageous to recharge frequently rather than only

whennecessaryꢀInfact,abattery’slifeisextendedifthecharge

level is maintained well above a low conditionꢀ

Cleaning Battery Term inals

WARNING

Most ba tte rie s a re not sold with instruc tions.

Howe ve r, wa rning s a re fre q ue ntly note d

on the c e ll c a p s. Re a d the m c a re fully.

REPLACING BATTERIES

NOTE:Invacarerecommendsthatbothbatteriesbereplaced

if one (1) battery is defective%

DO NOT a llow the liq uid in the b a tte ry to

c om e in c onta c t with skin, c lothe s or othe r

posse ssions. It is a form of a c id a nd ha rmful

or d a m a g ing b urns m a y re sult. Should the

liq uid touc h your skin, wa sh the a re a IM-

MEDIATELY a nd thoroug hly with c ool wa -

te r. In se rious c a se s or if e ye c onta c t is

ma de , se e k me dic a l a tte ntion IMMEDIATELY.

Recom m ended Battery Types

WARNING

The wa rra nty a nd p e rfo rm a nc e sp e c ifi-

c a tio ns c o nta ine d in this m a nua l a re

b a se d o n the use o f d e e p c yc le g e l c e ll

o r se a le d le a d a c id b a tte rie s. Inva c a re

stro ng ly re c o m m e nd s the ir use a s the

p o we r so urc e fo r this unit.

1ꢀ Examine the battery clamps and terminals for corrosionꢀ

2ꢀ Verifyplasticcapsareinplaceoverthebatterycellholesꢀ

Fa ilure to use the c orre c t b a tte ry size a nd /

or volta g e m a y c a use d a m a g e to your

whe e lc ha ir a nd g ive you unsa tisfa c tory

p e rfo rm a nc e .

3ꢀ Clean the terminals and inside the battery clamps by

usingabatterycleaningtool,wirebrush,ormediumgrade

sand paperꢀ

NOTE: Upon completion, these areas should be shiny,

notdull%

BATTERYSIZE

POWERCHAIR

Arrow

w/ motor/gearbox

w/ G/B motor

QTY VOLTS Standard Optional

4ꢀ Carefully dust off all metal particlesꢀ

12 Group24 Group22

12 Group22 Group24

Torque

with motor/gearbox

with G/B motor

Torque SP

12 Group22 Group24

INSTALLING/ REMOVING GROUP

24 BATTERY BOXES (FIGURE 8)

with motor/gearbox

with G/B motor

Storm X

with motor/gearbox

with G/B motor

12 Group22

N/A

NOTE: To remove the battery boxes from the wheelchair,

reversethefollowingprocedure%

N/A N/A

Installing

12 Group22 Group24

NOTE: FWD wheelchairs only - Remove the counter-

weightbeforeperformingthisprocedure%RefertoREMOV-

ING/INSTALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in PROCE-

DURE 16 of this manual%

NOTE: G/B denotes gearless/brushless%

NOTE: Both battery sizes are deep cycle batteries%

1ꢀ Verify that the ON/OFF switch on the joystick is in the

OFF positionꢀ

NOTE: Charge batteries daily% It is critical not to let them run

low at any time%

2ꢀ Placetwo(2)connectorbatteryboxontothebatterysub-

frame assembly with guide pins facing the inside of the

wheelchairꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the battery box(es) from the wheelchairꢀ Re-

fertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGGROUP24BATTERY

BOXESorINSTALLING/REMOVINGGROUP22BAT-

TERY BOX in this procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Slidethetwo(2)connectorbatteryboxalongthesub-

frameuntilitsguidepinsareengagedinthesub-frame

connectorꢀ

2ꢀ Removetheexistingbatteriesfromthebatterybox(es)ꢀ

RefertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERIESINTO/

FROM BATTERY BOX(ES) in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

4ꢀ Securethebatteryboxcarryingstraptothelidofthetwo

(2) connector battery boxꢀ

3ꢀ Clean the new battery terminalsꢀ Refer to CLEANING

BATTERYTERMINALSinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

NOTE: Visually inspect to ensure the connection is prop-

erly made% Connectors MUST be fully engaged%

4ꢀ Install the new batteries into the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer

toINSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERIESINTO/FROM

BATTERYBOX(ES) in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

BATTERIES

PROCEDURE 9

NOTE: Make certain that the carrying strap of the first

batteryboxinstalledispositionedontopofthebatterybox

and will not interfere with the second battery box guide

pins during installation%

INSTALLING/ REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX (FIGURE 9)

NOTE: This procedure is for MWD/RWD chairs ONLY%

5ꢀ Placeone(1)connectorbatteryboxontobatterysub-

frameꢀ

NOTE: To install the battery box onto the wheelchair, re-

versethefollowingprocedure%

6ꢀ Slide one (1) connector battery box along the sub-

frame until its guide pins are engaged in the connec-

tor of the two (2) connector battery boxꢀ

1ꢀ Place the wheelchair in a well ventilated area where

work can be performed without risking damage to car-

peting or floor coveringꢀ

7ꢀ Securethebatteryboxcarryingstraptothelidoftheone

(1) connector battery boxꢀ

2ꢀ Verify that the ON/OFF switch on the joystick is in the

OFF positionꢀ

NOTE: Visually inspect to ensure the connection is

properly made% Connectors MUST be fully engaged%

3ꢀ Disconnect the battery cable from the outside of the

batteryboxꢀ

C AUTIO N

4ꢀ Disconnect the battery box retention strapꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the battery boxꢀ

The b a tte ry b o x re ta ine r MUST b e lo c ke d

(c lip p e d ) se c ure ly to ho ld the b a tte ry

b oxe s firm ly in p la c e or b a tte ry b ox c on-

ne c to rs m a y b e d a m a g e d c a using e r-

ra tic c ha ir o p e ra tio n.

6ꢀ Slidethefour(4)clipsthatsecurethebatteryboxcover

to the battery box to the OPEN positionꢀ

NOTE: Arrows on the battery box cover point to the open

position%

8ꢀ Pull the battery box retainer down over the end of

front battery box until it is securely clipped (locked)

into placeꢀ

7ꢀ Remove battery box cover from the battery boxꢀ

Arrows

*Base Frame

NOTE: Position

carrying strap on top

of battery box

Battery Box

Retention Strap

Guide Pins

Battery Box

Sub-Frame

Guide Pins

FIGURE 9 - INSTALLING/ REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX

Two (2) Connector

Battery Box

One (1) Connector Battery Box

*Base Frame

Battery Box

Retainer Bar

*NOTE: Illustration depicts base frame for RWD and

MWD models% Batteries remove/Install for the Arrow

FWD in the same manner%

FIGURE 8 - INSTALLING/ REMOVING GROUP

24 BATTERY BOXES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 10

WIRING HARNESS

4ꢀ Disconnectthebatteryharness/chargercable(BLUE)

from the controller connector (BLUE)ꢀ

This Procedure includes the following:

Removing/Installing the Wiring Harness

Adjusting Limit Switch

5ꢀ Remove the two mounting screws that secure the

charger cable to the mounting bracketꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the wiring harnessꢀ

WARNING

Afte r ANY a djustme nts, re pa ir or se rvic e a nd BE-

FORE use , ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta c hing ha rdwa re

is tighte ne d se c ure ly - othe rwise injury or da m-

a ge ma y re sult.

Installing

1ꢀ For Group 24 Batteries Only - Install NEW wir-

ing harness w/bracket to the rear of the sub-frame

and torque mounting screws to 160-inch pounds

(DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING THE

WIRING HARNESS (FIGURE 1)

2ꢀ For Group 22 and Group 24 Batteries - Secure

the charger cable to the mounting bracket with the

two (2) mounting screwsꢀ Securely tighten (DE-

TAIL “C” OR “D”)ꢀ

NOTE: This procedure is for the FWD and MWD

models ONLY% For the removing and installing the wir-

ing harness on the Arrow FWD refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLING WIRING HARNESS in PROCEDURE

17 of this manual%

3ꢀ For Group 22 and Group 24 Batteries - Con-

nect the battery harness/charger cable (BLUE) to

the controller connector (BLUE) (DETAIL “C” or

“D”)ꢀ

Rem oving

4ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following sections:

1ꢀ Removethebatterybox(es)ꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVINGGROUP24 BATTERYBOXESorINSTALL-

ING/REMOVINGGROUP24 BATTERYBOXinPRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

SECOND GENERATION WHEELCHAIRS

WITH MOTOR/ GEARBOX ASSEMBLY

Aꢀ For Group 22 and Group 24 Batteries -

Group the two (2) motor/controller connections

together along with the controller/wiring har-

ness connection (BLUE) and secure with TIE-

WRAPS A and B (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

For Group 24 Batteries - remove the two mounting

screws and locknuts that secure the wiring harness

bracket to the base frame (DETAIL“A”)ꢀ

Bꢀ For Group 22 and Group 24 Batteries - Se-

cure the Wiring Harness Cable, Battery Charger

Cable, Controller Connector Cable, and Motor

Connector Cable to the suspension arm with

TIE-WRAP C (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

For Group 22 Batteries - cut the tie wrap that se-

cures the rear portion of the wiring harness and joy-

stick cable to the rear of the seat frame (DETAIL“B”)ꢀ

3ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following sections:

SECOND GENERATION WHEELCHAIRS

WITH MOTOR/ GEARBOX ASSEMBLY

Aꢀ Cut tie-wraps A and B that secure the two (2)

motor/controller connections and the controller/

wiring harness connection (BLUE connectors)

together (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

SEC O ND G ENERATIO N WHEELC HAIRS

WITH G EARLESS/ BRUSHLESS MO TO R

O PTIO N:

Aꢀ For Group 22 and Group 24 Batteries - Se-

cures the battery charger cable to the base

frame with TIE-WRAPA (DETAIL “D”)ꢀ

Bꢀ Cut tie-wrap C that secures the battery charger

cable, motor connector cable, controller connec-

tor cable, and wiring harness cable to the base

frame (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

5ꢀ For Group 22 Batteries Only - Tie-wrap NEW wir-

ing harness and joystick cable to the rear of the seat

frame (DETAIL “B”)ꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGGROUP22 BATTERYBOX

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

SECOND GENERATION WHEELCHAIRS

WITH GEARLESS/ BRUSHLESS MOTOR

Aꢀ Cut tie-wrap A that secures the battery charger

cable to the base frame (DETAIL “B”)ꢀ

NOTE: For STEPS 4-6 refer to Detail “C” or “D”%

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WIRING HARNESS

DETAIL A - GROUP 24 BATTERIES

PROCEDURE 10

DETAIL B - GROUP 22 BATTERIES

Wiring Harness

Bracket

Mounting

Screws

Joystick

Cable

Battery Box

Sub-Frame

REAR OF

CHAIR

Wiring

Harness

Base

Frame

Locknuts

FRONT OF

CHAIR

NOTE: Illustration depicts gearless/brushless motor%

Wiring harness is secured to the rear of the seat frame

in the same manner for wheelchairs with conventional

motor/gearbox assembly%

NOTE: Battery box sub-frame exploded away for clari-

fication purposes only%

DETAIL “C” -SECOND GENERATION

DETAIL “D” - SECOND GENERATION

WHEELCHAIRS WITH GEARLESS /BRUSHLESS

MOTOR

WHEELCHAIRS

Mounting

Screws

Battery

Wiring

Harness

Connector

(BLUE)

Controller

Connector

(BLUE)

Charger

Cable

Controller

Connector

Mounting

Screws

Motor

Connector

Charger

Mount

Tie-Wrap

Bracket

Charger

Cable

Tie-Wrap

Wiring

Harness

Cable

Motor

Connector

Cable

Tie-Wraps

A and B

NOTE: There is no

need to cut this

tie-wrap%

Controller

Connector

Motor

Connector

Wiring Harness

Connector

(BLUE)

Controller

Connector

(BLUE)

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/INSTALLING THE WIRING HARNESS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 10

WIRING HARNESS

3ꢀ Turn the wheelchair power switch on the joystick to the

ON positionꢀ

ADJ USTING LIMIT SWITCH

(FIGURE 2)

NOTE: The wheelchair should not operate%

NOTE: The following procedure is for high back captains

van seat model wheelchairs only%

4ꢀ IF wheelchair operates, proceed to the following steps

to adjust the actuator on the upper limit switch bracket:

WARNING

Aꢀ Fully recline the backꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING CAP-

TAINS VAN SEAT in PROCEDURE 4 of the

Owner’sManual,1081227ꢀ

NEVER ope ra te the whe e lc ha ir while in a ny

recline position over 114^oRELATIVE TO THE SEAT

FRAME. If the limit switc h doe s not stop the

whe e lc ha ir from ope ra ting in a re c line posi-

tion gre a te r tha n 114^oRELATIVE TO THE SEAT

FRAME, DO NOT ope ra te the whe e lc ha ir. Ad-

just the limit switc h BEFORE using the whe e l-

c ha ir, othe rwise injury or da ma ge c a n oc c ur.

NOTE: This will make access to the limit switch easier%

Bꢀ Loosen, but do not remove, the two (2) phillips

screws, washers and locknuts that secure the ac-

tuator to the upper limit switch bracketꢀ

Cꢀ SlidetheactuatorUP(towardsthetopofthewheel-

chair)ꢀ

1ꢀ Place the wheelchair on a level surfaceꢀ

2ꢀ Recline the captains van seat back to a 24^oto achieve

the 114^oangle relative to the seat frameꢀ Refer to AD-

JUSTINGCAPTAINSVANSEATinPROCEDURE4of

the owner’s manual, 1081227ꢀ

NOTE: The captains van seat frame is at a 5^oangle relative

to the ground% When the back angle is adjusted to 114^orela-

tive to the seat, it will measure 61^orelative to the ground%

NOTE: To determine 114^oback angle relative to the seat

frame, place a magnetic protractor (available at any hard-

ware store) on the back as shown in FIGURE 2 and adjust

the back until the magnetic protractor reads 61^o%

C AUTIO N

DO NOT ove r tighte n the phillips sc re ws tha t

se c ure the a c tua tor to the uppe r limit switc h

bra c ke t. Da ma ge to the a c tua tor c a n oc c ur.

Dꢀ Only tighten the two (2) phillips screws, washers

and locknuts that secure the actuator to the upper

limitswitchbracketuntiltheactuatordoesnotmoveꢀ

Eꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-3 until the wheelchair does not

operatewhenthecaptainsvanseatbackisata24^o

angleꢀ

114^o

24^oBack

Recline Angle

Upper Limit

Switch

Bracket

5-3/4 inches

Phillips

Screws,

Washers and

Locknuts

61^o

5^oSeat Angle

Actuator

Magnetic Protractor - (Will read 61^owhen back

recline angle is at 114^orelative to the seat frame)

FIGURE 2 - ADJUSTING LIMIT SWITCH

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RETENTION STRAP/RETAINER

PROCEDURE 11

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Bꢀ FWD MODEL - Reinstall the mounting screw,

washer,spacer,andlocknutthatsecuretheretainer

clip to the battery box sub-frameꢀ Use Loctite 242

and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Replacing Battery Box Retainer Bar/ Retainer Clip

-Group 24 Battery Base Frames

WARNING

5ꢀ Reinstall the battery boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING BATTERYBOXES - GROUP24 BATTERY

BASE FRAMES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

After ANY a djustments, repa ir or service a nd BE-

FORE use, ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta ching ha rdwa re

is tightened securely - otherwise injury or da m-

a ge ma y result.

Replacing Retainer Bar

REPLACING BATTERY BOX

RETAINER BAR/ RETAINER CLIP -

GROUP 24 BATTERY BASE FRAMES

(FIGURE 1)

1ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

Aꢀ RWD AND MWD MODELS -Remove the two (2)

mounting screws and spacers that secure the bat-

tery box retainer bar to the base frameꢀ

Bꢀ FWD MODELS - Remove the two (2) mounting

screws, spacers, washers, and locknuts that se-

cure the retainer bar to the battery box sub-frameꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOXES in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Pull up on the battery box retainer bar to remove it from

the base frameꢀ

Replacing Retainer Clip

3ꢀ Installthetwo(2)existingspacersthroughthemounting

1ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

holes in the NEW battery box retainer barꢀ

Aꢀ RWD AND MWD MODELS - Remove the

mountingscrewthatsecurestheretainerclipand

shock (or rubber element) to the base frameꢀ

WARNING

The Ba ttery Box Reta iner Ba r/Reta iner Clip MUST be

fa stened securely in pla ce before using the wheel-

c ha ir. Use Loc tite 242 a nd torque to 160-inc h

pounds.

Bꢀ FWD MODEL - Remove the mounting screw,

washer, spacer, and locknut that secure the re-

tainer clip to the battery box sub-frameꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the existing retainer clipꢀ

4ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

3ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

Aꢀ RWD AND MWD MODELS - Line up the NEW

batteryboxretainerbarandspacerswiththemount-

ing holes in the battery box sub frame and the base

frameꢀ

Aꢀ RWD AND MWD MODELS - Position the NEW

retainer clip between the shock (or rubber ele-

ment) and the battery box sub-frame as shown

in FIGURE 1ꢀ Make sure the angled end of the

retainer clip is facing upꢀ

Bꢀ FWD MODELS - Line up the NEW battery box

retainerbarandspacerswiththemountingholesin

the battery box sub frameꢀ

Bꢀ FWD MODEL - Position the NEW retainer clip

between the spacer and the battery box sub-

frame as shown in FIGURE 1ꢀ Make sure the

angled end of the retainer clip is facing upwardsꢀ

5ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

Aꢀ RWDAND MWD MODELS - Reinstall the mount-

ing screws that secure the battery box retainer bar

betweenbatteryboxsubframeandthebaseframeꢀ

Use Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

WARNING

The Ba tte ry Box Re ta ine r Ba r/Re ta ine r Clip MUST

be fa ste ne d se c ure ly in pla c e be fore using the

whe e lc ha ir. Use Loc tite 242 a nd torque to 160-

inc h pounds.

Bꢀ FWD MODELS - Reinstall the mounting screws

that secure the battery box retainer bar onto battery

box sub frameꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque to 160-

inch poundsꢀ

4ꢀ Perform one (1) the following:

Aꢀ RWDANDMWDMODELS-Reinstallthemount-

ingscrewthatsecurestheretainerclipandshock

(orrubberelement)tothebaseframeꢀUseLoctite

242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the both battery boxesꢀ Refer toINSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 12

WHEELS/MOTORS

RWD AND MWD MODELS

Shock

Assembly

Base Frame

Angled End

Mounting

Screws

Battery Box

Sub-frame

(Facing Upward)

Spacer

Retainer

Clip

Retainer

Bar

Top of Shock

Assembly

FWD MODELS

Spacer

Retainer

Clip

Washers

Retainer Bar

ASSEMBLED VIEW

Spacer

Locknuts

Mounting Screws

Battery Box

Sub-Frame

FIGURE 1 - REPLACING BATTERY BOX RETAINER BAR/RETAINER CLIP - GROUP 24 BATTERY BASE FRAMES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEELS/ MOTORS

PROCEDURE 12

2ꢀ Remove the four (4) beveled hex nuts that secure the

drive wheel assembly to the wheel hub assemblyꢀ

This Procedure includes the following:

Replacing Pneumatic Tires/Tubes - Drive Wheels/

Casters

3ꢀ Removeexistingdrivewheelassemblyfromwheelhubꢀ

Removing/Installing Drive Wheels

Removing/Installing Drive Wheel Hub

Installing Wheel Lock Bracket onto Wheelchair

Removing/Installing Casters

Replacing Forks

Installing

1ꢀ Reinstall new/existing drive wheel assembly to the

wheel hub assembly and torque the four (4) beveled

hex nuts to 160-inch poundsꢀ

2ꢀ Repeat procedure for opposite side of wheelchair, if

necessaryꢀ

Motor Replacement

3ꢀ Reinstall the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOXES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

WARNING

AfterANYadjustments, repairorservice and BEFORE

use, make sure all attaching hardware is tightened

securely - otherwise injury or damage may result.

CONVENTIONAL MOTOR WITH GEARBOX

CAUTION

Gearbox Drive Shaft

As with a ny ve hic le , the whe e ls a nd tire s should

be c he c ke d pe riodic a lly for c ra c ks a nd we a r

a nd should be re pla c e d.

Drive Wheel Assembly

Keystock

Four (4)

Beveled

REPLACING PNEUMATIC TIRES/

TUBES - DRIVE WHEELS/ CASTERS

Hex Nuts

Wheel Hub

*Washer

Assembly

WARNING

DO NOT use your whe e lc ha ir unle ss it ha s the

proper tire pressure (p.s.i.). DO NOT overinfla te the

tires. Fa ilure to follow these suggestions ma y ca use

the tire to explode a nd ca use bodily ha rm.

*Locknut

*NOTE: It is not required to remove the locknut and

washer to remove the drive wheel3

If tires a re pneuma tic, repla cement of tire or tube

MUST be performed by a n a uthorized Inva ca re

dea ler or qua lified technicia n.

GEARLESS/BRUSHLESS MOTOR

NOTE: If drive wheels or casters are pneumatic, under-in-

flation causes excessive wear which results in poor perfor-

mance of the tires3

Drive Wheel

Assembly

REMOVING/ INSTALLING DRIVE

WHEELS (FIGURE 1)

CAUTION

Pe rform the following proc e dure in a de signa te d

work a re a to pre ve nt da ma ge to flooring (c a r-

pe ting, tile , e tc .).

Wheel Hub

Assembly

Rem oving

1ꢀ Remove the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOXES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Four (4) Beveled Hex Nuts

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 12

WHEELS/MOTORS

REMOVING/ INSTALLING DRIVE

WHEEL HUB (FIGURE 1)

INSTALLING WHEEL LOCK BRACKET

ONTO WHEELCHAIR (FIGURE 2)

NOTE: This procedure can only be performed on sec- NOTE: This procedure only pertains to second gen-

ond generation storm wheelchairs with the conven- eration storm wheelchairs with the conventional mo-

tional motor/gearbox assembly3 On second genera- tor and gearbox3 On second generation storm wheel-

tion storm wheelchairs with the gearless/brushless chairs with the gearless/brushless motor, the wheel

motor, the drive wheel hub CANNOT be removed3 lock bracket is not required3

Return motor to manufacturer for service3

1ꢀ Removethetwo(2)mountingscrewsclosesttothelarge

Rem oving

wheel that secure the gearbox to the suspension armꢀ

2ꢀ Lineupmountingholesinthewheellockmountingbracket

with the gearbox mounting holes in the suspension armꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in this

procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Apply Loctite 242 to the two (2) mounting screwsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the locknut, washer, keystock and existing

drive wheel hub from the drive shaft of the gearboxꢀ

4ꢀ Reinstall the two (2) mounting screws into the mounting

holes of the wheel lock mounting bracket and gear box

and torque to 75-inch poundsꢀ

Installing

5ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-4 for opposite wheel lock bracketꢀ

1ꢀ Position the keystock on the gearbox drive shaftꢀ

6ꢀ Adjust the wheel locksꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING WHEEL

LOCKS in PROCEDURE 9 of the owner’s manual,

1081227ꢀ

CAUTION

DO NOT a pply more tha n a one (1)-inch (in length)

thin film of a nti-seize compound to the drive sha ft.

Applying more tha n one (1)-inch (in length) ca n

ca use the a nti-seize compound to lea k resulting

in da ma ge to flooring (ca rpet, tile, etc.).

Wheel Lock

Mounting

Screws

2ꢀ Apply a thin film of anti-seize compound one (1) inch in

length to the end of the drive shaftꢀ

Bracket

Gearbox

3ꢀ Reinstall drivewheelhubontothegearboxdriveshaftꢀ

Suspension

Arm

NOTE: While installing the drive wheel hub onto the drive

shaft, spin the drive wheel hub to evenly distribute the anti-

seize compound over the entire drive shaft3

4ꢀ Reinstall the washer and locknut and torque locknut to

45 foot pounds (540-inch pounds)ꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel assembly to the wheelchairꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELS

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

FIGURE 2 - INSTALLING WHEEL LOCK BRACKET

ONTO WHEELCHAIR

6ꢀ Repeat procedure for the opposite side of the wheel-

chair, if necessaryꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEELS/MOTORS

PROCEDURE 12

NOTE: Check bearing assemblies3 Replace if necessary3

6ꢀ Ensurenewforkslidescompletelyintocasterheadtubeꢀ

7ꢀ Install nylon washer and secure with locknutꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING CASTERS

(FIGURE 3)

WARNING

DO NOT use your power wheelcha ir unless it ha s

the proper tire pressure (p.s.i.). DO NOT over-infla te

the tires. Fa ilure to follow these suggestions ma y

ca use the tire to explode a nd ca use bodily ha rm.

The recommended tire pressure is listed on the side

wa ll of the tire.

WARNING

Improper positioning of the wa sher will prohibit the

free movement of the forks.

8ꢀ InstallthecasterontothenewforkꢀRefertoREMOV-

ING/INSTALLINGCASTERSinthisprocedureofthe

manualꢀ

Periodically, the tires will need to be replaced due to wear or

punctureꢀ

9ꢀ Adjust the forksꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING FORKS in

PROCEDURE 9 of the owner’s manual, 1081227

Dust Cover

Rem oving Casters

1ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, spacers and locknut that

secure the existing caster to the forkꢀ

Locknut

Nylon Washer

2ꢀ Remove the existing caster from the forkꢀ

Caster Headtube

Installing Casters

1ꢀ Position the new/existing caster into the forkꢀ

2ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw, spacers and locknut that

secure the caster to the forkꢀ

Fork

3ꢀ Torque locknut to 10-foot pounds (120-inch) poundsꢀ

4ꢀ Loosen the locknut 1/8 of a turnꢀ

FIGURE 4 - REPLACING FORKS

5ꢀ Move the caster side to sideꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING THE

MOTOR (CONVENTIONAL MOTOR

WITH GEARBOX) (FIGURE 5)

NOTE: If the caster moves side to side, tighten the locknut

slightly3 Repeat STEP 4 until there is no side to side move-

ment of the caster3

8-INCH

6-INCH

Rem oving

Mounting

Screw

Locknut

RWD AND MWD MODELS.

1ꢀ Disconnect the right and/or left motor connector from

the controllerꢀ

Locknut

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) allen screws and washers that

secure the motor to the gearboxꢀ

CAUTION

Mounting

Screw

DO NOT da ma ge the motor/ge a rbox c oupling.

Spacers

3ꢀ Carefully pull the motor away from the gearboxꢀ

FIGURE 3 - REMOVING/INSTALLING CASTERS

ARROW FWD MODEL.

1ꢀ Remove the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLINGSIDESHROUDASSEMBLYinPROCE-

DURE 17 of this manualꢀ

REPLACING FORKS (FIGURE 4)

1ꢀ Remove the caster from the existing forkꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING CASTERS in this proce-

dure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the counterweightꢀ Refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLINGCOUNTERWEIGHTin PROCEDURE

17 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the head tube capꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the locknut and nylon washerꢀ

4ꢀ Drop the existing fork out of the caster head tubeꢀ

5ꢀ Slide the new fork into the caster head tubeꢀ

3ꢀ Removethebatterybox(es)ꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOXES in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 12

WHEELS/MOTORS

4ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, spacers, and 8ꢀ Install the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

washers that secure the MKIV controller to the base

frameꢀ Set MKIV controller onto ground/floorꢀ

MOVING GROUP24 BATTERYBOXESin PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

NOTE: STEPS 5, 6, and 7 are necessary to obtain 9ꢀ Install the counterweightꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

easier access to the motor/controller connection3

STALLING THE COUNTERWEIGHT in PROCE-

DURE 17 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and spacer that secure

the top of the shock to the base frameꢀ

10ꢀ InstallthefrontshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING FRONT SHROUD in PROCEDURE 17 of this

manualꢀ

6ꢀ Loosen, DO NOT remove, the mounting screw that se-

cures the bottom of the shock to the suspension armꢀ

ARROW FWD MODEL ONLY

Base

7ꢀ Rotate top of shock toward the inside of the wheelchairꢀ

Mounting Screw

Frame

]

8ꢀ Disconnect the motor connector from controllerꢀ

(REMOVE)

Locknut

9ꢀ Remove the two (2) allen screws and washers that

secure the motor to the gearboxꢀ

Spacer

MKIV

Controller

CAUTION

DO NOT damage the motor/gearbox coupling.

Washer

10ꢀ Carefully pull the motor away from the gearboxꢀ

Shock

Installing

Suspension

Mounting Screw

(Loosen, DO NOT

REMOVE)

Mounting

Screws

1ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Arm

Aꢀ For RWD and MWD perform STEPS 2-3ꢀ

Bꢀ For FWD ONLY perform STEPS 2-10ꢀ

RWD, MWD, AND ARROW FWD MODELS

2ꢀ Perform the following:

Aꢀ Inspect the coupling for wear and damageꢀ If dam-

age is evident, replace couplingꢀ

Motor

Connector

Bꢀ Installcouplingontogearboxinputshaftinsertingcou-

pling drive plate onto slot on shaftꢀ

Cꢀ Carefully align motor and coupling and place motor

against gearboxꢀ

Motor Connector

Motor

Dꢀ Withmotoragainstgearbox,turngearboxdriveshaft

until the coupler seats into gearboxꢀ

NOTE: When properly aligned, motor will be seated into

gearbox3

Coupling

Eꢀ Install two (2) allen screwsꢀ Use Loctite 242, tighten

allen screws evenly and then torque to 75-inch lbsꢀ

Allen

Screw

Gearbox

3ꢀ Reconnect right and/or left motor connector to controllerꢀ

4ꢀ Rotatethetopoftheshockoftheshocktowardtheinside

of the wheelchairꢀ

Washer

Slots*

5ꢀ Installthemountingscrewandspacerthatsecurethetop

of the shock to the base frameꢀ Torque to 156 - inch

poundsꢀ

*NOTE: The following slot locations must line up for proper

installation: Slots on coupling of motor, the slots on the

coupling and the slots on the gearbox3

6ꢀ Tighten the mounting screw that secures the bottom of

the shock to the suspension armꢀ Torque to 156 - inch

poundsꢀ

FIGURE 5 - REMOVING/INSTALLING THE MOTOR -

CONVENTIONAL MOTOR/GEARBOX FOR RWD,

MWD AND FWD MODELS

7ꢀ Install the two mounting screws that secure the MKIV

controllertothebaseframeꢀTorqueto156-inchpoundsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

WHEELS/MOTORS

PROCEDURE 12

3ꢀ Secure motor to the suspension arm with existing

four (4) mounting screwsꢀ Torque to 13 foot/poundsꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING THE

MOTOR (GEARLESS/ BRUSHLESS

MOTOR) (FIGURE 6)

4ꢀ Slide the motor lock lever along brake release shaft

until the end is flush with the bushing guideꢀ

Rem oving

5ꢀ Slide alignment pin, located inside of bushing guide,

into the end of the motor lock lever and secure in

place with existing mounting screw and washerꢀ Se-

curely tightenꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOXES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

6ꢀ Secure motor lock lever in place on the brake re-

lease shaft with existing mounting screwꢀ

2ꢀ Unthread the mounting screws that secure the wiring

harness connector to the motor (DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

7ꢀ Install the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in this

procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Unplug the wiring harness connector from the motorꢀ

4ꢀ If necessary, remove the group 22 battery box trayꢀ

Referto REMOVING/INSTALLINGGROUP 22 BAT- 8ꢀ If necessary, install the group 22 battery box trayꢀ Re-

TERY BOX TRAY in PROCEDURE 16 of this

manualꢀ

fer to REMOVING/INSTALLING GROUP 22 BAT-

TERY BOX TRAY in PROCEDURE 16 of this

manualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in this 9ꢀ Plug the wiring harness connector into the motorꢀ

procedure of the manualꢀ

10ꢀ Secure the wiring harness connector to the motor

6ꢀ Note the mounting position of the motor on the sus-

pension arm before removing the motorꢀ

with the existing two (2) mounting screwsꢀ

11ꢀ Remove the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOXES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

7ꢀ Loosenadjustmentscrewthatsecuresthemotorlock

lever in place on the brake release shaftꢀ

NOTE: Alignment pin is located inside of bushing guide

on the suspension arm3

8ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and washer that se-

cure the alignment pin in placeꢀ

9ꢀ Slide the alignment pin back out of the end of the

motor lock leverꢀ

10ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws and washers

that secure the motor to the suspension armꢀ

11ꢀ Remove motor with motor lock lever from suspen-

sion armꢀ

12ꢀ If replacing motor, remove the motor lock lever from

the brake release shaft of the existing motorꢀ

Installing

NOTE: Do not tighten adjustment screw of motor lock le-

ver until motor is secured in place on the suspension arm3

1ꢀ If necessary, install motor lock lever onto new brake

release shaft of motorꢀ

2ꢀ Position the new/existing motor with motor lock lever

onto the suspension arm in the mounting position

notedfromSTEP4ofREMOVINGTHEGEARLESS/

BRUSHLESS MOTOR in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 12

WHEELS/MOTORS

Brake Release Shaft

Guide

Bushing

*Alignment Pin

Mounting Screw

Washer

Motor

Mounting

Screw

Suspension

Arm

Washer

Mounting

Screws

DETAIL “A”

Motor Lock

Lever

Mounting Screws

Adjustment

Screw

Motor

Mounting

Screws

Wiring Harness

Connector

*NOTE: Alignment pin exploded away suspension arm for clarification purposes only3

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING MOTOR - GEARLESS/BRUSHLESS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ELECTRONICS

PROCEDURE 13

This Procedure Includes the Following:

11ꢀ Position the armrest pad on the armrest plateꢀ

Repositioning MKIV Joystick - Van Seat Models

Removing/Installing MKIV Controller

12ꢀ Line up the mounting holes in the armrest insert, arm-

rest plate and armrest padꢀ

13ꢀ Reinstall rearphillipsscrewthroughthe armrestinsert,

armrest plate and armrest pad and tighten securelyꢀ

WARNING

After ANY adjustments, repair or service and BEFORE

use,make sure thatallattaching hardware istightened

securely - otherwise injury or damage may result.

14ꢀ Reinstall the front phillips screw into the armrest plate

and new armrest pad and tighten securelyꢀ

15ꢀ Repeat STEPS 11-14 for opposite side of wheelchairꢀ

REPOSITIONING MKIV J OYSTICK -

VAN SEAT MODELS (FIGURE 1)

1ꢀ Turn the lever on the adjustment lock to release the

adjustment lock from joystick mounting tubeꢀ

16ꢀ Install the three (3) hex bolts, spacers and locknuts

that secure the joystick mounting bracket to the arm-

rest plateꢀ

17ꢀ Slide the joystick mounting tube through the joystick

mounting bracket to the desired positionꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the joystick mounting tube from wheelchairꢀ

18ꢀ Secure the adjustment lock to the joystick mounting

tube by turning the lever on the adjustment lockꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the three (3) hex bolts, spacers and locknuts

that secure joystick mounting bracket to armrest plateꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the phillips screws that secures the front of the

armrest pad to the armrest plateꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING MKIV

CONTROLLER (FIGURE 2)

5ꢀ Remove the phillips screw that secures the rear of the

armrest pad and armrest insert to the armrest plateꢀ

RWD and MWD Models

6ꢀ Remove the armrest pad from the armrest plateꢀ

REMOVING.

7ꢀ Remove the lug bolt, washers and locknut that secure

the existing armrest plate to the armrest weldmentꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the shroud that covers the MKIV controllerꢀ

2ꢀ Disconnecttheleft/rightmotorleadsandbatteryleadsꢀ

8ꢀ Repeat STEPS 4-7 for opposite side of the wheelchairꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) hex bolts that secure the existing

MKIV controller to the wheelchairꢀ

9ꢀ Position armrest plate with joystick mounting holes on

desired side of armrest weldment and secure with lug

bolt, washers and locknutꢀ Refer to FIGURE 1 for cor- 4ꢀ Remove existing MKIV controller from the wheelchairꢀ

rect hardware orientationꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the three (3) mounting screws that secure

10ꢀ Position armrest plate without joystick mounting holes

on opposite side of the armrest weldment and secure

with lug bolt, washers and locknutꢀ Refer to FIGURE

1 for correct hardware orientationꢀ

the mounting plate to the MKIV controllerꢀ

INSTALLING.

1ꢀ Install the three (3) mounting screws into the mounting

plate and secure to the MKIV controllerꢀ

Armrest Plate

Lug Bolt (STEPS 7, 9)

Armrest Insert

Locknuts

2ꢀ Secure the new/existing MKIV controller to the wheel-

chair with two (2) hex boltsꢀ

(STEPS 3,16)

Phillips Screw

(STEPS 5, 13)

3ꢀ Connect the left/right motor leads and battery leads

4ꢀ Install shroud over the MKIV controllerꢀ

Locknut

(STEPS 7, 9)

Armrest

Pad

Washer

(STEPS 7, 9)

Mounting

Plate

Hex Bolts

(STEPS 3, 16)

Phillips

Screws

(STEPS 4,

14)

Base Frame

Hex

Mounting Screws

Bolts

Armrest

Weldment

Washers

(STEPS 7, 9)

MKIV Controller

Spacers

(STEPS 3, 16)

Joystick Mounting

Bracket (STEPS 3, 16)

NOTE: Controller for gearless/brushless motor re-

moves in the same manner3

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING MKIV

CONTROLLER

FIGURE 1 - REPOSITIONING MKIV JOYSTICK -

VAN SEAT MODELS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 13

ELECTRONICS

Arrow Fwd Model

REMOVING.

INSTALLING.

1ꢀ Connect left hand motor/controller connection of NEW

controllerꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING FRONT SHROUD in PROCEDURE 17 of

this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Rotate top of left shock into positionꢀ

3ꢀ Secure top of left shock to base frame with washer and

mounting screwꢀ Torque to 360 - inch poundsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the counterweightꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in PROCEDURE 17

of this manualꢀ

4ꢀ Removemountingscrewandwasherthatsecurethetop

of the right shock to the base frameꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the battery box(es)ꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Rotate shock toward inside of wheelchairꢀ

6ꢀ Connect right hand motor/controller connectionꢀ

7ꢀ Rotate shock back into positionꢀ

4ꢀ Disconnect the joystick cable from the top of the control-

lerꢀ

8ꢀ Secure top of right shock to base frame with washer and

mounting screwꢀ Torque to 156 - inch poundsꢀ

5ꢀ Disconnectthebatterywiringharnessandcontrollercon-

nectionꢀ

9ꢀ Torquethebottommountingscrewofeachshockto 160

- inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, spacers, wash-

ers, and locknuts that secure the MKIV controller to the

base frameꢀ Set MKIV controller onto ground/floorꢀ

10ꢀ Secure the MKIV controller to the base frame with the

two(2)existingmountingscrews,spacers,washers, and

locknutsꢀ

7ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and spacer that secure the

top of right shock to the base frameꢀ

11ꢀ Connect the joystick cable to the top of the controllerꢀ

12ꢀ Connect the battery wiring harness and controller con-

nectionꢀ

8ꢀ Loosen, DO NOT remove, the mounting screw that se-

cure the bottom of the right shock to the suspension armꢀ

13ꢀ Installthebatterybox(es)ꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOXES in PROCEDURE

9of this manualꢀ

9ꢀ Rotate top of right shock toward inside of the wheelchairꢀ

10ꢀ Disconnect right hand motor/controller connectionꢀ

11ꢀ Rotate top of right shock back into positionꢀ

14ꢀ InstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING COUNTERWEIGHT in PROCEDURE 17 of this

manualꢀ

12ꢀ Loosely install mounting screw through top of shock and

into base frameꢀ DO NOT tighten at this pointꢀ

13ꢀ To disconnect left hand motor/controller connection, per-

form STEPS 5-8 for opposite side of controllerꢀ

15ꢀ Install the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING FRONT SHROUD in PROCEDURE 17

of this manualꢀ

Top Mounting

Screw and

Washer

Locknut

Base Frame

Spacer

Washer

Mounting

Screw

Shock

Bottom Mounting

Screw

Controller

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING MKIV CONTROLLER - ARROW FWD MODEL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECLINER

PROCEDURE 14

9ꢀ Secure limit switch sensor to the seat frame with the

two (2) mounting screws and washersꢀ

This Procedure Includes the Following:

Positioning Limit Switch

10ꢀ Secure the wire retainer onto the INSIDE of the seat

frame with the mounting screwꢀ

Adjusting Limit Switch

Replacing Recliner Cable Assemblies

Replacing/Adjusting Gas Cylinders

Changing Back Height

11ꢀ Tie wrap the limit switch wire to the seat frameꢀ

12ꢀ Adjust the limit switchꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING LIMIT

SWITCH in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Mounting Screws (DO

NOT Over Tighten)

Limit Switch Sensor

Changing Seat Depth

Changing Seat Width

Washers

Installing/Replacing Adjustable 16 to 19-inch Deep

Recliner Seat Frame onto Arrow or X Base

Tie

WARNING

Wraps

Mounting

Screws

AfterANYadjustments, repairorservice and BEFORE

use, ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta ching ha rdwa re is tight-

ened securely - otherwise injury or da ma ge ma y

result.

Wire

Retainer

POSITIONING LIMIT SWITCH

(FIGURE 1)

Seat

Frame

Actuator

Gas Cylinder

Pivot Block

NOTE: The battery charger connector, as well as, the limit

switch are factory set on the RIGHT side of the wheelchair3

However, they can be positioned on either side for user

convenience3 The limit switch MUST BE positioned on the

same side as the battery charger connector3

Mounting Screws

(DO NOT

Limit

Switch

Sensor

Overtighten)

Actuator

Washers

FIGURE 1 - POSITIONING LIMIT SWITCH

1ꢀ Cut the two (2) tie wraps that secure the limit switch

wire to the seat frameꢀ

ADJ USTING LIMIT SWITCH

(FIGURE 2)

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and washers

that secure the actuator to the gas cylinder pivot blockꢀ

WARNING

3ꢀ Position actuator on opposite gas cylinder pivot blockꢀ

NEVER ope ra te the whe e lc ha ir while in a ny re -

c line position ove r 105^oRELATIVE TO THE SEAT

FRAME. If the limit switc h doe s not stop the whe e l-

c ha ir from ope ra ting in a re c line position gre a te r

tha n 105^oRELATIVE TO THE SEAT FRAME, do not

ope ra te the whe e lc ha ir. Adjust the limit switc h

BEFORE using the whe e lc ha ir, othe rwise injury

or da ma ge c a n oc c ur.

CAUTION

DO NOT over tighten the mounting screws tha t se-

cure the a ctua tor to the pivot block. Da ma ge to

a ctua tor will occur.

4ꢀ Secure the actuator to the pivot block with the two (2)

mounting screws and washersꢀ DO NOT overtightenꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the wire

retainer to the inside of the seat frameꢀ

1ꢀ Recline the back of the wheelchair until the gas cylin-

der rod measures 3-21/32 of an inchꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and washers

that secure the limit switch sensor to the seat frameꢀ

2ꢀ Turn the power of the joystick to the ON positionꢀ

NOTE:ALLsegmentsofthebargraphonthejoystickshould

start to flash on and off and the wheelchair should not op-

erate3

7ꢀ Turn limit switch sensor over so opposite side is facing

up and the wire is on the INSIDE of the seat frameꢀ

8ꢀ Position the limit switch sensor onto the opposite side

of the seat frameꢀ

3ꢀ IF the wheelchair operates, proceed to the following

steps to adjust the actuator on the gas cylinder pivot

block:

CAUTION

DO NOT ove r tighte n the mounting sc re ws tha t

se c ure the limit switc h se nsor to the se a t fra me .

Da ma ge to the limit switc h se nsor will oc c ur.

Aꢀ Loosen, but do not remove, the two (2) mounting

screws and washers that secure the actuator to

the gas cylinder pivot blockꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 14

RECLINER

Bꢀ Slide actuator UP (towards top of the wheelchair)ꢀ 6ꢀ Remove the operator of the existing recliner cable

assembly from the pivot blockꢀ

CAUTION

7ꢀ Make sure the threads of the gas cylinder rod are

DO NOT over tighten the mounting screws tha t

secure the a ctua tor to the pivot block. Da ma ge

flush with the inside of the pivot blockꢀ

to the a ctua tor will occur.

8ꢀ With the operator of the NEW recliner cable assem-

bly on the inside of the recliner seat frame, line up the

mountingholeintheoperatorofthenewreclinercable

assembly with the gas cylinder rodꢀ

Cꢀ Only tighten the two (2) mounting screws and

washers that secure the actuator to the gas cylin-

der pivot block until the actuator does not moveꢀ

CAUTION

Dꢀ Repeat STEPS 1 and 2 until the wheelchair does

not operate when the gas cylinder rod is 3-21/32-

inch longꢀ

DO NOT forc e the ga s c ylinde r rod into the op-

e ra tor of the re c line r c a ble a sse mbly.

POSITION OVER

105^ORELATIVE TO

DO NOT c ross thre a d the ope ra tor of the re c line r

c a ble a sse mbly with the ga s c ylinde r.

THE SEAT FRAME

Gas Cylinder

Rod Measures

3-21/32-inches

If sla c k in the re c line r c a ble or move me nt in the

ope ra tor of the c a ble a sse mbly c a n not be e limi-

na te d, DO NOT use the re c line r c a ble a sse mbly.

9ꢀ Screw the NEW gas cylinder into the operator of the

cableassemblyuntilthejamnutsitsonthepivotblock,

there is no slack in the recliner cable and there is no

movement in the operator of the recliner cable as-

semblyꢀ

Mounting Screws and Washers

(DO NOT Over-Tighten)

Mounting Bracket

Pan Screw

Actuator

Gas Cylinder

Pivot Block

Mounting Screw

Handle

FIGURE 2 - ADJUSTING LIMIT SWITCH

Washer

Nylon

Washers

REPLACING RECLINER CABLE

ASSEMBLIES (FIGURE 3)

Locknut

Gas Cylinder

Tie

NOTE: There are three (3) different cable lengths de-

pending on back height:

Wraps

Back Cane

CABLE LENGTH

Short

Medium

Long

BACK HEIGHT

18-1/2 and 20-inches

22 and 24-inches

26-inches

Cable

Operator

Gas Cylinder

Rod

WARNING

Re pla c e ONE (1) re c line r c a ble a sse mbly a t a

time to a void injury.

No Slack

in Cable

Jam

Nut

1ꢀ Cutthetiewrapsthatsecuretheexistingreclinercable

assembly to the back caneꢀ

Cable

Snapped

into Slot

2ꢀ Remove the pan screw that secures the handle of

theexistingreclinercableassemblytothebackcaneꢀ

Pivot

Block

3ꢀ Loosen the jam nut on the gas cylinder rodꢀ

Handle

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washer, nylon wash-

ers and locknut that secure the TOP of the gas cylin-

der to the mounting bracket on the back caneꢀ

NO Movement in Operator

of the Recliner Cable

Assembly

Cable Fitting

Seated Properly

5ꢀ Unscrew the gas cylinder from the operator of the

existing recliner cable assembly but do not remove

the gas cylinder from the pivot blockꢀ

FIGURE 3 - REPLACING RECLINER CABLE ASSEMBLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECLINER

PROCEDURE 14

10ꢀ Visually inspect the handle to make sure that the cable If slack in the recliner cable or movement in the operator of

is snapped completely into slot in handle and cable fit- the cable assembly can not be eliminated, DO NOT use

the recliner cable assemblyꢀ

ting is seat properly in the handleꢀ

6ꢀ Screw the NEW gas cylinder into the operator of the

cableassemblyuntilthejamnutsitsonthepivotblock,

thereisnoslackinreclinercableandthereisnomove-

ment in the operator of the recliner cable assemblyꢀ

11ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw through the mounting

bracket of the back cane, nylon washer, gas cylinder,

nylon washer, mounting bracket and washer and se-

curely tighten with the existing locknutꢀ Torque to 75-

inch poundsꢀ

7ꢀ Visuallyinspectthehandletomakesurethatthecable

is snapped completely into slot in handle and cable

fitting is seat properly in the handleꢀ

12ꢀ Line up the mounting hole in the handle of the recliner

cableassemblywiththemountingholeinthebackcaneꢀ

8ꢀ Press the operator of the recliner cable assembly to

extend the NEW gas cylinderꢀ

13ꢀ Insert the pan screw through the handle of the recliner

cableassemblyandthebackcaneandtorqueto9-inch

poundsꢀ

9ꢀ Line up the mounting holes of the NEW gas cylinder

and the bracket of the back caneꢀ

14ꢀ Tiewrapthereclinercableassemblytothereclinerback

caneꢀ

10ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw through the mounting

bracket of the back cane, nylon washer, NEW gas

cylinder, nylonwasher, mountingbracketandwasher

and securely tighten with the existing locknutꢀ Torque

to 75-inch poundsꢀ

15ꢀ Adjust the gas cylinderꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING GAS

CYLINDERS in this procedure of the manualꢀ

REPLACING/ ADJ USTING GAS

CYLINDERS (FIGURE 4)

11ꢀ Adjust the NEW gas cylindersꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING

GAS CYLINDERS in this procedure of the manualꢀ

WARNING

Repla ce ONE (1) ga s cylinder a t a time to a void

injury.

Mounting Bracket

Nylon Washer

Both ga s cylinders MUST be opera tiona l a nd a d-

justed properly BEFORE using the recliner. DO NOT

opera te the recliner if only one (1) of the ga s cylin-

ders is opera tiona l or a djusted properly.

Handle

Mounting

Screw

Washer

Locknut

Replacing Gas Cylinder

Gas Cylinder

Rod

No Slack

in Cable

1ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washer, nylon washers

and locknut that secure the TOP of the gas cylinder to

mounting bracket on back caneꢀ

Jam Nut

2ꢀ Loosen the jam nut on existing gas cylinder rodꢀ

3ꢀ Unscrew the existing gas cylinder from the operator of

the recliner cable assembly and the pivot block and

remove the existing gas cylinder from the wheelchairꢀ

Gas Cylinder

Rod Threads

Gas

Cylinder

4ꢀ Screw cylinder rod of the NEW gas cylinder into the

pivotblockuntilthethreadsofthecylinderrodareflush

with inside of pivot block (FIGURE 4)ꢀ

Pivot Block

NO Movement in Operator

of the Recliner Cable

Assembly

Cable

Snapped

into Slot

5ꢀ With the operator of the recliner cable assembly on

the inside of the recliner seat frame, line up the mount-

ing hole in the operator of the recliner cable assembly

with the new gas cylinder rodꢀ

Handle

Cable Fitting

Seated Properly

CAUTION

DO NOT force the ga s cylinder rod into the opera -

tor of the recliner ca ble a ssembly.

FIGURE 4 - REPLACING/ADJUSTING GAS CYLINDERS

DO NOT cross threa d the opera tor of the recliner

ca ble a ssembly with the ga s cylinder.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 14

RECLINER

6ꢀ Turn the spreader bar on the existing back canes

CLOCKWISE (toward back upholstery) and remove

the spreader bar from the existing back canesꢀ

Adjusting Gas Cylinder

1ꢀ ToadjusttheLEFT gascylinder:Squeezethehandle

of the RIGHT recliner cable assembly and try to re-

cline the backꢀ The back should not reclineꢀ

7ꢀ Loosely install the spreader bar onto the NEW back

cane handles by rotating the spreader bar COUN-

TERCLOCKWISE (away from the back canes)ꢀ

2ꢀ If the LEFT side of the back releases without

squeezing the handle of the LEFT recliner cable

assembly, perform the following steps:

NOTE: If the spreader bar does not thread onto the back

canes, do not forceꢀ Turn the spreader bar around and

repeat STEP 7ꢀ

Aꢀ Finger tighten the jam nut on the rod of the gas

cylinder until it bottoms out on the rod of the

cylinder (FIGURE 4)ꢀ

8ꢀ Line up two (2) bottom mounting holes of back canes

with the two (2) mounting holes in the seat frameꢀ

Bꢀ Turn the jam nut on the LEFT gas cylinder

COUNTERCLOCKWISE approximately one-

half (1/2) revolutionꢀ

WARNING

The b a c k c a ne s MUST b e fa ste ne d se -

c ure ly to the se a t fra m e BEFORE using the

whe e lc ha ir. To rq ue m o unting sc re ws to

156-inc h p o und s.

NOTE: The gas cylinder rod will turnꢀ

Cꢀ Repeat STEP 1ꢀ

Dꢀ Repeat STEP B until the LEFT side of the back

DOES NOT reclineꢀ

9ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw, washer and locknut

throughthebackcaneandseatframemountingholes

and torque to 156-inch poundsꢀ

3ꢀ To adjust the RIGHT gas cylinder: Repeat STEPS

1 and 2 for the LEFT handle of the cable assemblyꢀ

10ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw through the mounting

bracket of the back cane, nylon washer, mounting

hole in the TOP of the gas cylinder, nylon washer,

mounting bracket and washer and securely tighten

with the existing locknutꢀ Torque to 75-inch poundsꢀ

C AUTIO N

Da m a g e to the g a s c ylind e r ro d WILL o c -

c ur if the following ste p s a re NOT followe d

whe n the ja m nut is to rq ue d a g a inst the

p ivo t b lo c k.

11ꢀ Reinstall the recliner cable assemblies onto the back

canesꢀ Refer to REPLACING RECLINER CABLES

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

4ꢀ Using NO LARGER than 1/4-inch wide, fine toothed

pliers, wrap masking tape around the teeth of the

pliers two (2) or (3) revolutionsꢀ

Headrest

Extension

Tube

Back Cane

5ꢀ Using NO excessive force, hold the gas cylinder

rod just above the jam nutꢀ

6ꢀ Whileholdingthegascylinderrodandusinga17mm

wrench, turn the jam nut CLOCKWISE and torque

the RIGHT and LEFT jam nuts against the RIGHT

and LEFT pivot blocks to 156-inch poundsꢀ

Spreader

Bar

Mounting

Screw

Mounting

CHANGING BACK HEIGHT

(FIGURE 5)

Bracket

Washers

Locknut

Push

1ꢀ Press the push pins on the headrest extension tubes

in and remove headrest extension from back canesꢀ

Mounting

Screw

2ꢀ Remove the recliner cables from the back canesꢀ

Referto REPLACING RECLINER CABLE ASSEM-

BLIES in this procedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screws, washers and lock-

nuts that secure the TOP of the gas cylinders to the

mounting bracket on the back canesꢀ

Seat Frame

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screws, washers and lock-

nuts that secure the back canes to the seat frameꢀ

NOTE: Upholstery not shown for clarityꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the existing recliner back assembly from

the wheelchairꢀ

FIGURE 5 - CHANGING BACK HEIGHT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RECLINER

PROCEDURE 14

NOTE:Therearethree(3)differentcablelengthsdepending

on back height:

Seat Pan Rem oval/ Replacem ent Procedures:

1ꢀ Remove the seat cushion from the wheelchairꢀ

BACKHEIGHT(ininches)

CABLELENGTH

18-1/2,20 22, 24

2ꢀ Remove the six (6) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure seat pan, seat positioning strap to the

seat frameꢀ

Short Medium Long

NOTE: New recliner cables will be needed if back height is

changedtoaheightnotwithinthelengthoftheoriginalcableꢀ

3ꢀ Install new 1-inch deeper/shorter seat pan onto seat

frameꢀ

12ꢀ Installthe NEWbackupholsteryontothebackcanesꢀ

13ꢀ Install the ten (10) or twelve (12) mounting screws

(depending on back height) that secure the back up-

holstery to the recliner back canesꢀ

4ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screws, spacers and lock-

nuts and torque to 75-inch poundsꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the protective strips on the seat pan and

reinstall the seat cushion onto the seat panꢀ

14ꢀ Reinstallheadrestextensionontoreclinerbackcanesꢀ

15ꢀ Adjust the tautness of the back and headrest uphol-

steryꢀ Refer toADJUSTING BACK OR HEADREST

UPHOLSTERY in this procedure of the manualꢀ

NOTE: Clean upholstery with a warm damp cloth and mild

detergent to remove superficial soilꢀ

WARNING

La unde ring or moisture will re duc e the fla me

re ta rd a tion of the up holste ry.

CHANGING SEAT DEPTH (FIGURE 6)

NOTE:16-inch,17-inch,18-inchor19-inchseatdepthsCAN

NOT be increased to 20-inches or deeperꢀ If needing to in-

creasetoaseatdepthof20-inchesordeeper,thebaseframe

MUST be converted from a STANDARD base frame to a

LONG base frame as wellꢀ

Hex Screws

NOTE: 20-inch, 21-inch or 22-inch seat depths CAN NOT

bedecreasedto19-inchesorlessꢀ Ifneedingtodecreaseto

a seat depth of 19-inches or less, the base frame MUST be

convertedfromaLONGbaseframeto a STANDARDbase

frameꢀ

Seat Pan

Seat

Positioning

Strap

Seat

To adjustseat depth of wheelchair, use following guidelines:

Frame

If the current seat depth is an ODD number, iꢀeꢀ, 17-inches,

19-inches or 21-inches, the seat depth CANNOT be IN-

CREASED without changing the seat frameꢀ Refer to IN-

STALLING/REPLACING ADJUSTABLE 16 TO 19-INCH

DEEP RECLINER SEATFRAME ONTO ARROW OR X

BASE FRAMES in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Locknuts

FIGURE 6 - CHANGING SEAT DEPTH

If the current seat depth is an ODD number, iꢀeꢀ, 17-inches,

19-inchesor21-inches,theseatdepthcanbeDECREASED

by1-inchbyinstallinga1-inchshorterseatpanꢀRefertothe

following procedures:

CHANGING SEAT WIDTH

To change seat width, the seat frame must be changed to

thedesiredwidthꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REPLACINGAD-

JUSTABLE 16 TO 19-INCH DEEP RECLINER SEAT

FRAME ONTO ARROW OR X BASE FRAME in this

procedure of the manualꢀ

IfthecurrentseatdepthisanEVENnumber,iꢀeꢀ,*16-inches,

18-inches,20-inchesor22-inches,theseatdepthCANNOT

beDECREASEDwithoutchangingtheseatframeꢀReferto

INSTALLING/REPLACINGADJUSTABLE16TO19-INCH

DEEP RECLINER SEATFRAME ONTO ARROW OR X

BASE FRAME in this procedure of the manualꢀ

NOTE: If changing the seat width of the wheelchair, the

back and headrest upholstery, seat pan and cushion also

need to be changedꢀ

NOTE:Ifchangingtheseatwidthofthewheelchair,theback

canes, spreader bar and headrest pillow may also need to

bechangedꢀRefertothefollowingcharts:

*NOTE: 16-inch seat depth is the smallest seat depth avail-

able on recliner seat framesꢀ

If the current seat depth is an EVEN number, iꢀeꢀ, 16-inches,

18-inches, 20-inches or *22-inches, the seat depth can be

INCREASED by 1-inch by installing a 1-inch deeper seat

panꢀ Refer to the following procedures:

BACK CANES AND SPREADER BAR SEAT WIDTH

RANGES

14-17-INCHES

18-24-INCHES

HEADREST PILLOWS SEAT WIDTH RANGES (IN

INCHES)

*NOTE: 22-inch seat depth is the deepest seat depth avail-

able on recliner seat framesꢀ

14-15,16-18,19-20OR21-24

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 14

RECLINER

If the seat width required is within the range of the original

back canes, spreader bar and headrest pillow, the original

components can still be usedꢀ

10ꢀ Perform instructions outlined in PREPARATIONS

FOR REMOVING/INSTALLING SEAT FRAME

(STANDARDFRAME,ADJUSTABLEFRAME,AND

CAPTAINS VAN SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this

manual:

IftheseatwidthrequiredisNOTwithintherangeoftheorigi-

nalbackcanes, spreaderbarandheadrestpillow, theorigi-

nal components can not be usedꢀ

Recliner

Mounting

EQUIPMENT OPTION

Seat Assembly

Screws

INSTALLING/ REPLACING

ADJ USTABLE 16 TO 19-INCH DEEP

RECLINER SEAT FRAME ONTO

ARROW OR X BASE FRAME

(FIGURE 7)

1ꢀ PerforminstructionsoutlinedinPREPARATIONSFOR

REMOVING/INSTALLINGSEATFRAME(STANDARD

FRAME,ADJUSTABLEFRAME,ANDCAPTAINSVAN

SEAT) in PROCEDURE 6 of this manual:

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following in PROCEDURE 7 of

this manual:

Spacer

Aꢀ Remove standard seat frame subassemblyꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING STANDARD SEAT

FRAMESUBASSEMBLYꢀ

Base

Bꢀ Remove adjustable seat frame subassemblyꢀ Re-

fer to INSTALLING/REMOVING ADJUSTABLE

SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY AND OR COMPO-

NENTREPLACEMENTꢀ

Frame

Cꢀ Remove captains van seatꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGCAPTAINSVANSEATASSEMBLYꢀ

3ꢀ Remove seat pan on reclinerꢀ

4ꢀ Installnewreclinerseatassemblyontoseatmountplatesꢀ

5ꢀ Securereclinerseatassemblytoseatmountplateswith

the mounting screws, spacers and locknutsꢀTorque the

mounting screws to 156-inch poundsꢀ

NOTE: There are three (3) types of seat mount plates; low,

medium, and high heightsꢀ The seat mount plate shown in

this illustration represents the medium heightꢀ Refer to

MOUNTING PLATE - SEATANGLEADJUSTMENTAND

INSTALLATION ORIENTATION in PROCEDURE 6 of this

manual for illustrations of the low and high heightsꢀ

Seat Mount

Plate

Locknuts

Warning Label

6ꢀ PositionlimitswitchontowheelchairꢀRefertoPOSITION-

INGLIMITSWITCHinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

7ꢀ Reinstall recliner seat pan with existing six (6) mount-

ing screwsꢀ

8ꢀ Install the two (2) warnings labels onto the two (2)

suspension arm assembliesꢀ Refer to FIGURE 7 for

correct label placementꢀ

Inside of

Suspension Arm

Assembly

9ꢀ Installbatterybox(es)ꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING BATTERY BOXES- GROUP 24 BATTERY

BASE FRAMES or INSTALLING/REMOVING BAT-

TERYBOX-GROUP22BATTERYBASEFRAMES

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

FIGURE 7 - INSTALLING/REPLACING ADJUSTABLE 16

TO 19-INCH DEEP RECLINER SEAT FRAME ONTO

ARROW OR X BASE

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 15

2ꢀ Reinstall the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

shocks, retainer bar, spacers and retainer clips to the

base frameꢀ Refer to REPLACING BATTERY BOX

RETAINER/RETAINERCLIP-GROUP24BATTERY

BASE FRAMES in PROCEDURE 11 of this manualꢀ

Use Loctite 242 and torque mounting screws to 160-

inch poundsꢀ

This Procedure includes the following:

Removing/Installing Group 24 Battery Box Sub-Frame

Removing/Installing Group 22 Battery Box Tray

Converting Group 22 Batteries To Group 24 Batteries

Shock Replacement

Shock Spring Replacement

3ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE9ofthismanualꢀUseLoctite242andtorque

mounting screws to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Replacing Stabilizer Fork Assembly

Replacing Stabilizer Wheels

Replacing Stabilizer Cylinder Springs

Adjusting Weight Distribution

Mounting

Screws

Adjusting Stabilizers

Installing/Removing Gearbox

Wiring Harness

w/Bracket

Replacing Suspension Arm

FRONT OF

CHAIR

WARNING

Sub-Frame

Afte r ANY a djustme nts, re pa ir or se rvic e a nd BE-

FORE use , ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta c hing ha rdwa re

is tighte ne d se c ure ly - othe rwise injury or da m-

a ge ma y re sult.

Locknuts

REAR OF CHAIR

Battery Box Sub-frame

REAR OF

CHAIR

REMOVING/ INSTALLING GROUP 24

BATTERY BOX SUB-FRAME (FIGURE 1)

Rem oving

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP24BATTERYBOXESinPROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Mounting

Screws

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure the wiring harness w/bracket and the rear

of the existing sub-frame to the base frameꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING WIRING HARNESS in

PROCEDURE 10 of this manualꢀ

Retainer Clip

FRONT OF CHAIR

Spacer

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GROUP 24 BATTERY

BOX SUB-FRAME

3ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

shocks, retainer bar, spacers and retainer clips to the

base frameꢀ Refer to REPLACING BATTERY BOX

RETAINER/RETAINERCLIP-GROUP24BATTERY

BASE FRAMES in PROCEDURE 11 of this manualꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX TRAY (FIGURE 2)

Rem oving

4ꢀ Remove the existing sub-frame assemblyꢀ

1ꢀ Remove battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

Installing

1ꢀ Install the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts that

secure the wiring harness w/bracket and the back of

the NEW sub-frame to the base frameꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING/INSTALLING THE WIRING HARNESS in

PROCEDURE 10 ofthismanualꢀUseLoctite242and

torque mounting screws to 160-inch poundsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure rear of battery box tray to the base frameꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) front locknuts that secure the bat-

tery box tray to battery mount bracketsꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the battery box trayꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 15

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

Installing

3ꢀ Disconnect the right and left motor connectors from

the controller connectorsꢀ

1ꢀ Install battery box tray onto base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws that secure

the charger cable to the mount bracketꢀ

2ꢀ Secure the front of the battery box tray to battery

mount brackets with existing locknutsꢀ Torque to

160-inch poundsꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the charger cable from the mount bracketꢀ

5ꢀ Cut the tie-wrap that secures the wiring harness to

the seat frameꢀ

3ꢀ Secure the rear of the battery box tray to the base

frame with existing mounting screws and locknutsꢀ

Torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the wiring harnessꢀ

4ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

7ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure

the battery mount brackets to the base frame and

remove the battery mount bracketsꢀ

Tie Wrap

Battery Mount

Bracket

Front Locknuts

FRONT OF

CHAIR

Mounting

Screws

Charger Cable/

Bracket

Motor

Connector

REAR OF

CHAIR

Battery

Box Tray

Base

Frame

Rear Locknuts

Motor Connector

Spacer

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GROUP 22

BATTERY BOX TRAY

Locknut

Mounting

Screws

EQUIPMENT OPTION

Base Frame

CONVERTING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOX TRAY TO GROUP 24 BATTERY

BOX SUB FRAME

Shock

NOTE: The battery box tray and battery mount brackets will

notbeusedwiththisoptionꢀKeepforfutureuseꢀ

Battery Mount Bracket

Rem oving Group 22 Com ponents (FIGURE 3)

FIGURE 3 - REMOVING GROUP 22 COMPONENTS

1ꢀ Remove the battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY BOX in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Installing Group 24 Com ponents (FIGURE 4)

1ꢀ Align the mounting holes of the NEW wiring harness

w/bracket, the NEW battery box sub-frame and the

mounting holes in the base frameꢀ

2ꢀ RemovetheexistingbatteryboxtrayꢀRefertoREMOV-

ING/INSTALLING THE GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX

TRAYin this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Install the two (2) mounting screws through all three (3)

parts and secure with locknutsꢀ Torque to 160-inch

poundsꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

WARNING

PROCEDURE 15

4ꢀ Install the mounting screw that secures the retainer

clip to the battery box sub-frameꢀ Use Loctite 242 and

torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

The Ba tte ry Bo x Re ta ine r/ Re ta ine r Clip

MUST b e fa ste ne d se c ure ly in p la c e b e -

fore using the whe e lc ha ir. Use Loc tite 242

a nd torq ue to 160-inc h p ound s.

5ꢀ Align the NEW battery box retainer and spacers with

the mounting holes in the base frame making sure the

closed end of the battery box retainer is pointing upꢀ

3ꢀ Position the NEW retainer clip between the NEW bat-

teryboxsub-frameandshockmakingsuretheretainer

clipmountingholeistowardsthebottomandtheclosed

end of the clip is against the battery box retainer barꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screws that secure the battery

box retainer to the base frameꢀ Use Loctite 242 and

torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

7ꢀ Install charger cable to existing mounting bracket se-

cure with existing two (2) mounting screwsꢀ

STEPS 1-2

8ꢀ Tie-wrap NEW wiring harness to the seat frameꢀ

Mounting

Screws

9ꢀ Connect the following cables:

aꢀ The right and left motor connectors to the control-

ler connectorsꢀ

Wiring Harness

w/Bracket

FRONT OF

bꢀ The battery harness/charger cable (BLUE) to the

controller connector (BLUE)ꢀ

CHAIR

Battery Box

10ꢀ Install the NEW battery boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGGROUP22 BATTERYBOXinPROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Sub-Frame

Locknuts

REAR OF CHAIR

SHOCK REPLACEMENT

Base Frame

Group 24 Battery Base Fram es (FIGURE 5)

STEPS 3-6

Battery Box

Sub-frame

1ꢀ Remove the front battery boxꢀ Refer toINSTALLING/

REMOVINGGROUP24BATTERYBOXESinPRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

REAR OF

CHAIR

2ꢀ RemovethedrivewheelassemblyꢀRefertoREMOV-

ING/INSTALLING THE DRIVE WHEEL in PROCE-

DURE 12 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ Loosen the mounting screw that secures the battery

box retainer between the battery box sub frame as-

sembly and the base frameꢀ

FRONT OF

CHAIR

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the top of

the shock and retainer clip between the battery box

sub frame assembly and the base frameꢀ

Mounting Screws

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

NOTE: Remove and hold onto the retainer clip for instal-

lation of the NEW shock)

Spacer

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, two (2) flat washers,

two (2) spring washers, two (2) inner link spacers,

and locknut that secures the bottom of the shock,

suspension arm, and stabilizer bracket togetherꢀ

Retainer

Clip

Shock

6ꢀ Remove the existing shockꢀ

7ꢀ Install the NEW shockꢀ

Closed End

FIGURE 4 - INSTALLING GROUP 24 COMPONENTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 15

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

8ꢀ Secure the bottom of the NEW shock, suspension arm,

and stabilizer bracket together with the mounting screw,

two(2)flatwashers, two(2)springwashers, two(2)inner

link spacers, and locknutꢀ Torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

WARNING

The Ba tte ry Bo x Re ta ine r/ Re ta ine r Clip

MUST b e fa ste ne d se c ure ly in p la c e b e -

fore using the whe e lc ha ir. Use Loc tite 242

a nd to rq ue to 160-inc h p o und s.

Base Frame

9ꢀ Position retainer clip between shock and battery box

sub-framemakingsuretheretainerclipmountinghole

is towards the bottom and the closed end of clip is

against battery box retainerꢀ

Battery Box

Retainer Bar

Stabilizer

Battery Box

Assembly*

10ꢀ Securetopofshockandretainerclipbetweenbattery

boxsubframeandbaseframeꢀApplyLoctite242and

torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Sub- Frame

11ꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and torque the mounting screw that

securesthebatteryboxretainerbetweenthebatterybox

sub frame and base frameꢀTorque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Mounting Screw

Loosen, DO NOT

REMOVE (STEPS

3,11)

12ꢀ ReassemblelargewheeltohubassemblyandTorque

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Shock

13ꢀ Repeat this procedure for the opposite shockꢀ

Battery Box Sub-Frame

Retainer Clip

14ꢀ Reinstall the front battery boxꢀ Refer toINSTALLING/

REMOVINGGROUP24BATTERYBOXES inPRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Top of Shock

Group 22 Battery Base Fram es (FIGURE 6)

NOTE: Top of stabilizer*

Mounting

Screw

exploded away for clarity only)

1ꢀ Remove the battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY BOX in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Base

Frame

2ꢀ Remove the four (4) nuts that secure the large wheel

assembly to the to the hub assembly and remove the

large wheel assemblyꢀ

Mounting

Screw

Shock

3ꢀ Loosen the mounting screw that secures the spacer

between battery mount bracket and the base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Removemountingscrewthatsecurestopoftheshock

between battery mount bracket and base frameꢀ

Spring

Washer

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, two (2) flat washers,

two (2) spring washers, two (2) inner link spacers,

and locknut that secures the bottom of the shock,

suspension arm, and stabilizer bracket togetherꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the existing shockꢀ

7ꢀ Install the NEW shockꢀ

Inner Link

Spacer

Suspension

Arm

8ꢀ Secure the bottom of the NEW shock, suspension arm,

and stabilizer bracket together with the mounting screw,

two(2)flatwashers, two(2)springwashers, two(2)inner

link spacers, and locknutꢀ Torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Stabilizer

Bracket

Flat Washer

Locknut

NOTE: The spacer and retainer are not shown for clarity)

*NOTE: The spring shown on the stabilizer is for wheel-

chair models built before 7/1/1999

9ꢀ Secure the top of shock between battery mount

bracketandbaseframeꢀApplyLoctite242andtorque

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

FIGURE 5 - SHOCK REPLACEMENT - GROUP 24

BATTERY BASE FRAMES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 15

10ꢀ ApplyLoctite242andtorquethemountingscrewthat

securesthespacerbetweenthebatterymountbracket

and base frameꢀ Torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Bꢀ (Group 22 Battery Base Frames) Loosen the

mounting screw that secures the battery box

spacerbetweenthebatteryboxtraymountbracket

and the base frameꢀ

11ꢀ ReassemblelargewheeltohubassemblyandTorque

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the top of

the stabilizer cylinder to the base frameꢀ

12ꢀ Repeat this procedure for the opposite shockꢀ

4ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

13ꢀ Reinstall the battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 22 BATTERY BOX in PROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Aꢀ (Group 24 Battery Base Frames) Remove the

mountingscrewthatsecuresthetopoftheshock

between the battery box sub-frame and the base

frameꢀ

Base Frame

Battery Mount Bracket

Mounting

Screw

Bꢀ (Group 22 Battery Base Frames) Remove the

mountingscrewthatsecuresthetopoftheshock

between retainer clip and the battery box tray

mount bracket and the base frameꢀ

Flat Washer

Mounting

Screw

NOTE:(Group24BatteryBaseFramesOnly)Remove

and hold onto the retainer clip for reinstallation of shock)

5ꢀ Swing the top of both the stabilizer cylinder and the

shock forwardꢀ

Suspension

Arm

6ꢀ Hold the spring retainer and turn the shock eyelet as-

sembly COUNTERCLOCKWISEtounthreaditfrom

the shockꢀ

Spring

Washer

Stabilizer*

7ꢀ Remove the spring retainer and springꢀ

8ꢀ Place the NEW spring onto the shockꢀ

Inner Link Spacer

Shock

Locknut

Stabilizer Bracket

9ꢀ Reinstall the shock eyelet assembly and the spring

retainer onto the NEW springꢀ

NOTE: Top of stabilizer exploded away for clarity only)

*NOTE: The spring shown on the stabilizer is for wheel-

chair models built before 7/1/1999

10ꢀ While holding the spring retainer, torque the shock

eyelet assembly to 245-inch poundsꢀ

FIGURE 6 - SHOCK REPLACEMENT - GROUP 22

BATTERY BASE FRAMES

11ꢀ (Group 24 Battery Base Frames) Position the re-

tainerclipbetweentheshockandthebatteryboxsub-

frame making sure the retainer clip mounting hole is

towards the bottom and the closed end of the clip is

against the battery box retainerꢀ

SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

(FIGURE 7)

12ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

NOTE: Heavy Duty Models Only) Shock springs on stan-

dardmodelscannotbeindividuallyreplaced)Anewshock

assemblymustbeinstalled)RefertoSHOCKREPLACE-

MENT in this procedure of the manual)

Aꢀ (Group 24 Battery Base Frames) Apply Loctite

242 and torque the mounting screw that secures

the battery box retainer to the base frame to 160-

inch poundsꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the front battery boxꢀ Refer toINSTALLING/

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGGROUP22BATTERYBOX

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Bꢀ (Group 22 Battery Base Frames) Apply Loctite

242 and torque the mounting screw that secures

the battery mount bracket to the base frame to

160-inch poundsꢀ

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

13ꢀ Secure the top of the shock and retainer clip (Group

24) to base frameꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and torque to

160-inch poundsꢀ

Aꢀ (Group 24 Battery Base Frames) Loosen the

mounting screw that secures the battery box re-

tainerbetweenthebatteryboxsubframeassem-

bly and the base frameꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 15

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

14ꢀ Reinstall the front battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/ 2ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, two (2) washers, two

REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGGROUP22BATTERYBOX

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

(2) spring washers, two (2) outer link spacers, two

(2) flat washers, and locknut that secure the stabi-

lizer fork assembly, stabilizer bracket, and stabi-

lizer wheel togetherꢀ

3ꢀ Secure NEW stabilizer fork assembly to stabilizer

bracket and stabilizer wheel with existing mount-

ing screw, two (2) washers, two (2) spring wash-

ers, two (2) outer link spacers, two (2) flat wash-

ers, and locknutꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

Shock Eyelet

Spring

Assembly

Retainer

Shock

Spring

4ꢀ Secure top of stabilizer fork assembly to base frame

with existing mounting screw and locknutꢀ Torque to

40 in/lbsꢀ

REPLACING STABILIZER WHEELS

(FIGURE 8)

Spring

Base

1ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, two (2) washers, two

(2) spring washers, two (2) outer link spacers, two

(2) flat washers, and locknut that secure the stabi-

lizer wheel, stabilizer bracket, and stabilizer fork

assembly togetherꢀ

Shock

FIGURE 7 - SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

2ꢀ Secure NEW stabilizer wheel to stabilizer bracket

and stabilizer fork assembly with existing mount-

ing screw, two (2) washers, two (2) spring wash-

ers, two (2) outer link spacers, two (2) flat wash-

ers, and locknutꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

REPLACING STABILIZER FORK

ASSEMBLY (FIGURE 8)

1ꢀ Removethemountingscrewandlocknutthatsecures

thetopofthestabilizerforkassemblytothebaseframeꢀ

NOTE: Remove this mounting screw and

locknut only when replacing the stabilizer

fork assembly)

Base Frame

Locknut

Mounting Screw

Stabilizer

Bracket

Stabilizer

Fork

Assembly*

Flat

Washer

Locknut

Washer

Spring Washer

Outer Link Spacers

Stabilizer Wheel

Washer

*NOTE: The spring shown on the stabilizer fork assembly is for wheelchair models built before 7/1/1999

FIGURE 8 - REPLACING STABILIZER FORK ASSEMBLY/REPLACING STABILIZER WHEELS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 15

REPLACING STABILIZER

CYLINDER SPRING (FIGURE 9)

ADJ USTING WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION

(FIGURE 10)

NOTE: Stabilizer springs are only on wheelchair mod- NOTE: The seat mount plates and seat support brackets

els built before 7/1/1999) allow seat frame to be repositioned along the base frame)

1ꢀ Remove mounting screw and locknut that secures NOTE: The position of the seat support brackets is factory

top of the stabilizer fork assembly to the base frameꢀ set at 5-1/2-inches from the front end of the base frame)

Use the following chart as a starting point)

2ꢀ Unthread adjustment barrel and remove from stabi-

lizer rodꢀ

Weight of

User

Distance of Seat

Support Bracket*

3ꢀ Unthread jam nut and remove from stabilizer rodꢀ

under 200-lbs

over 200-lbs

5-7-inches

6-8-inches

4ꢀ Unthread adjustment nut and remove from stabilizer

rodꢀ

5ꢀ Remove spring retainer from stabilizer rodꢀ

6ꢀ Remove existing stabilizer springꢀ

7ꢀ Install NEW stabilizer springꢀ

8ꢀ Reinstall spring retainerꢀ

* Distance measured from the front of the base frame to

the front of the seat support bracketꢀ

NOTE: Following the above chart will put 85-90% of the

total weight of the chair and user over the large wheels)

However, these settings may not be the most desirable in

terms of maneuverability and comfort for the user)

9ꢀ Reinstall adjustment nutꢀ

10ꢀ Reinstall jam nutꢀ

Adjustm ent for Optim um Perform ance

11ꢀ Reinstall adjustment barrelꢀ

1ꢀ Loosen the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

seat support brackets to the base frameꢀ

12ꢀ AdjuststabilizerꢀRefertoADJUSTINGSTABILIZERS

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Adjust seat back until one (1) of the following occurs:

Base Frame

Aꢀ The clearance of the front riggings and the stabi-

lizers is at a minimum or

Bꢀ The rear stop is contactedꢀ

WARNING

DO NOT a djust sea t beyond limit stops.

Mounting

Screw

3ꢀ Retighten mounting screws securing the seat support

brackets to the base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Test wheelchair for handlingꢀ

Locknut

Adjustment

5ꢀ If handling of the power wheelchair is drifting, repeat

thisproceduremovingseatupinsmallincrementsuntil

the chair handles properlyꢀ

Barrel

Jam Nut

6ꢀ Once the seat is adjusted to the point of proper han-

dling, comfort adjustments can be made

Adjustment

Nut

7ꢀ Check distance the stabilizer wheels are off the floorꢀ

Aꢀ If distance is between 3/8 and 1/2-inches off of the

floor the user will experience a “normal” amount of

rocking when stopping or negotiating steeper in-

clines, depending on the amount of brakingꢀ

Stabilizer

Spring

Retainer

Bꢀ If distance is greater than 1/2-inches off of floor

the amount of rocking the user experiences when

stopping or negotiating steeper inclines will in-

creaseꢀ

Stabilizer

Rod

FIGURE 9 - REPLACING STABILIZER CYLINDER SPRING

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 15

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

NOTE:Thissettingwouldallowthewheelchairto

rollbetteronthickercarpetingandminimizescuff-

ingꢀ

WARNING

The thre a de d rod must be e nga ge d in the

a djustment ba rrel a t lea st eight (8) full threa ds.

Othe rwise , injury or da ma ge ma y oc c ur.

Cꢀ If distance is between 0 and 3/8-inch, along with

an increase in spring compression, the amount

ofrockingtheuserexperienceswilldecreaseꢀAl-

though, this setting would minimize rocking, ob-

stacles protruding from the ground as well as ne-

gotiating steeper inclines will be more difficultꢀ

5ꢀ Realign the top of stabilizer fork assembly with the

mounting hole in the base frame noted earlierꢀ

NOTE: Further height adjustment can be accomplished

by using the alternate mounting hole in the base frameꢀ

See DETAIL “A”ꢀ

8ꢀ Adjustthestabilizerstothedesiredsettingdetermined

in STEP 7ꢀ Refer to ADJUSTING STABILIZERS in

this procedure of the manualꢀ

6ꢀ Secure stabilizer to base frame with existing mount-

ing screw and locknutꢀ

Seat Support Bracket

7ꢀ To increase spring compression, refer to ADJUST-

ING SPRING COMPRESSION in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

NOTE: Adjust both stabilizers equally to maintain proper

handlingꢀ

8ꢀ Repeat for opposite stabilizerꢀ

9ꢀ Testwheelchairforhandling/maneuverabilityꢀ

Front of

Base Frame

10ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-7 until desired comfort and ma-

neuverability is achieved

Adjusting Spring Com pression

Mounting Screws

(Two (2) on each

Front of Seat

bracket)

1ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following

Aꢀ Toincreasespringcompression,turnadjustment

Support Bracket

nut CLOCKWISE two (2) to four (4) revolutionsꢀ

FIGURE 10 -ADJUSTING WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION

Bꢀ Todecreasespringcompression,turnadjustment

nut COUNTERCLOCKWISE two (2) to four (4)

revolutionsꢀ

ADJ USTING STABILIZERS

(FIGURE 11)

Alternate Mounting Hole

Base

NOTE: Adjust the stabilizers to the desired handling/ma-

neuverability determined in ADJUSTING WEIGHT DIS-

TRIBUTION in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Frame

Mounting Screw

Top of

Stabilizer Fork

Assembly

NOTE: Note the mounting position of the stabilizer to the

base frame for proper reinstallationꢀ

Locknut

Height Adjustm ent

DETAIL “A”

1ꢀ Removethemountingscrewandlocknutthatsecures

the top of the stabilizer fork assembly to the base

frameꢀ

Adjustment

Barrel

Top of Stabilizer

Fork Assembly

2ꢀ Swing top end of stabilizer fork assembly forwardꢀ

3ꢀ Loosen jam nut, located below adjustment barrelꢀ

4ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Jam Nut

Threaded

Rod

Adjustment Nut

Spring

Turntheadjustmentbarrel CLOCKWISEtoraisethe

stabilizer wheelꢀ

Turntheadjustmentbarrel COUNTERCLOCKWISE

to lower the stabilizer wheelꢀ

FIGURE 11 - ADJUSTING STABILIZERS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 15

2ꢀ Countthenumberofexposedthreadsandrepeatthis 2ꢀ Whenreassemblingthegearboxtothesuspensionarm,

procedure for the opposite shockꢀ

use Loctite 242 and torque mounting screws to 160-

inch poundsꢀ

3ꢀ Proceed to STEP 9 in HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT OF

STABILIZERS in this procedure of the manualꢀ

NOTE: Replace any parts that show signs of wear or dam-

ageꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING GEARBOX

(FIGURE 12)

3ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel hub to the new gearbox drive

shaftꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE

WHEEL HUBS in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

C AUTIO N

4ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheels onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Pe rform the following p roc e d ure in a d e s-

ig na te d work a re a to p re ve nt d a m a g e to

flooring (c a rp e ting , tile , e tc .).

5/16-18 x 1-1/4-inch

Mounting Screws

Rem oving

5/16-18 x 2-1/2-inch

Mounting Screws

1ꢀ Remove the drive wheels from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

WARNING

When reinsta lling the

g e a rb ox ALWAYS

use the m ounting

hole s furthe st ba c k

on the suspe nsion

a rm. DO NOT reposi-

tion the motors.

2ꢀ Remove the drive wheel hub from the existing gearbox

drive shaftꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE

WHEEL HUBS in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

NOTE: Note the mounting position of gearbox to the sus-

pension arm before gearbox disassemblyꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

motor/gearbox to the suspension armꢀ

4ꢀ If necessary, remove existing motor from gearboxꢀ Re-

fertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEMOTORinPRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ If necessary, install existing motor onto NEW gearboxꢀ

Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING THE MOTOR in

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Motor

Gearbox

Suspension Arm

Installing

FIGURE 12 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GEARBOX

WARNING

Whe n re insta lling the g e a rb ox ALWAYS use

the mounting hole s furthe st ba c k on the sus-

pe nsion a rm. DO NOT re position the motors.

REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM

(FIGURE 13)

C AUTIO N

1ꢀ Remove the drive wheels from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

The FRONT mounting sc re ws tha t se c ure the

ge a rbox to the suspe nsion a rm MUST be 5/

16-18 x 2-1/ 2-inc he s long a nd the REAR he x

sc re ws tha t se c ure the g e a rb ox to the sus-

pe nsion a rm MUST be 5/ 16-18 x 1-1/ 4-inc he s

long . Othe rwise d a m a g e to the g e a rb ox

c a sting c a n re sult.

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ (GROUP 24) - Loosen the mounting screws that

secures the wiring harness and the battery sub-

frame to the base frame assemblyꢀ

Bꢀ (GROUP 22) - Loosen the two (2) mounting

screws that secures the rear of the battery tray to

the sub-frame assemblyꢀ

1ꢀ Position the NEW gearbox with the mounting holes fur-

thest back on the suspension armꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 15

MWD WHEELCHAIRS

3ꢀ Remove gearbox from the existing suspension armꢀ Re- NOTE: When installing the tubular end of the NEW sus-

fertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthisproce- pension arm, the beveled washer MUST be placed on

dureofthemanualꢀ

the inside and outside of the base frame, with the bevels

facing each otherꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, two (2) flat washers,

two (2) spring washers, two (2) inner link spacers, 10ꢀ Secure tubular end of the NEW suspension arm as-

and locknut that secures the bracket end of the sus-

pension arm, the bottom of the shock, and stabilizer

bracket togetherꢀ

sembly to base frame with existing mounting screwꢀ

11ꢀ Torque suspension arm mounting screw (1/2 x 7-

inches) to 85 FOOT pounds (approximately 1,020-

inch pounds) and replace plug buttonsꢀ

5ꢀ Remove plug button from the middle of base frameꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and the beveled wash- 12ꢀ Reinstall thegearboxontotheexistingsuspensionarmꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthis

procedure of the manualꢀ

ers that secures the tubular end of the suspension

arm assembly to the base frameꢀ

13ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

7ꢀ Remove the suspension arm from the wheelchairꢀ

Aꢀ (GROUP 24)-Tightenthemountingscrewsthat

secures the wiring harness and the battery sub-

frame to the base frame assemblyꢀ

8ꢀ PositionbracketendofNEWsuspensionarmaround

shockꢀ

9ꢀ Thread existing mounting screw through stabilizer

bracket, bracket end of suspension arm, and bottom

of shock with mounting screw, two (2) flat washers,

two (2) spring washers, two (2) inner link spacers,

andlocknutꢀSeeDETAIL“A”forproperhardwareori-

Bꢀ (GROUP 22) - tighten the two (2) mounting

screws that secures the rear of the battery tray to

the sub-frame assemblyꢀ

14ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

entationꢀ

Bracket End of Suspension Arm

Tubular End of

Suspension Arm

15ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-14 for the opposite side of the

wheelchair, if necessaryꢀ

NOTE: Top of shock and stabi-

lizer exploded away for clarifica-

tionpurposesonlyꢀRemovalfrom

base frame is not requiredꢀ

Base Frame

STEPS 4,8, AND 9

Mounting

Screw

Bracket End of

Suspension Arm

Inner Link

Spacer

Tubular End of

Suspension Arm

(STEPS 6,10)

Flat

Washer

Beveled

Washer

(STEPS

6,10)

Hex Nut

(STEPS 6,11)

Spring Washer

Bottom of Shock

Stabilizer Bracket

Locknut

Mounting Screw (STEPS 6,10)

Plug Button (STEP 5)

FIGURE 13 - REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

This Procedure includes the following:

Removing/Installing Group 24 Battery Box Sub-Frame

Removing/Installing Group 22 Battery Box Tray

Converting Group 22 Batteries to Group 24 Batteries

Shock Replacement

Shock Spring Replacement

Rubber Element Replacement

Converting Torque and X Rubber Elements to Shocks

Anti-Tipper Wheel Replacement

Removing/Installing Gearbox

2ꢀ Reinstallthefour(4)mountingscrewsthatsecuretheshocks,

retainer bar, spacers and retainer clips to the base frameꢀ

Refer to REPLACING BATTERYBOX RETAINER/RE-

TAINERCLIP-GROUP24BATTERYBASEFRAMESin

PROCEDURE 11 of this manualꢀ Use Loctite 242 and

torque mounting screws to 160-inch poundsꢀ

3ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

INGGROUP24 BATTERYBOXES inPROCEDURE9

ofthismanualꢀUseLoctite242andtorquemountingscrews

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Adjusting Weight Distribution

Repositioning Motor/Gearbox Assembly

Repositioning Gearless/Brushless Motor

Replacing Suspension Arm for Wheelchairs with

Motor/Gearbox assembly

Replacing Suspension Arm for Wheelchairs with

Gearless/Brushless Motor

Mounting

Screws

Wiring Harness

w/Bracket

Removing/Installing the Anti-tip Assembly

REAR OF

Sub-Frame

CHAIR

WARNING

Afte r ANY a djustme nts, re pa ir or se rvic e a nd BE-

FORE use , ma ke sure tha t a ll a tta c hing ha rdwa re

is tighte ne d se c ure ly - othe rwise injury or da m-

a ge ma y re sult.

Locknuts

FRONT OF CHAIR

Battery Box

Sub-frame

FRONT OF

CHAIR

REMOVING/ INSTALLING GROUP 24

BATTERY BOX SUB-FRAME (FIGURE 1)

Rem oving

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVINGGROUP24 BATTERYBOXESinPROCE-

DURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Mounting

Screws

REAR OF CHAIR

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure the wiring harness w/bracket and the rear

of the existing sub-frame to the base frameꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEWIRINGHARNESS

in PROCEDURE 10 of this manualꢀ

Retainer Clip

Spacer

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GROUP 24 BATTERY

BOX SUB-FRAME

3ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

shocks, retainer bar, spacers and retainer clips to the

base frameꢀ Refer to REPLACING BATTERY BOX

RETAINER/RETAINERCLIP-GROUP24BATTERY

BASE FRAMES in PROCEDURE 11 of this manualꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX TRAY (FIGURE 2)

Rem oving

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the existing sub-frame assemblyꢀ

Installing

2ꢀ Removethetwo(2)rearlocknutsthatsecurethebattery

box tray to battery mount bracketsꢀ

1ꢀ Install the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts that

secure the wiring harness w/bracket and the back of

the NEW sub-frame to the base frameꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING/INSTALLING THE WIRING HARNESS in

PROCEDURE 10 ofthismanualꢀUseLoctite242and

torque mounting screws to 160-inch poundsꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) front bolts and locknuts that secure

the battery box tray to the base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the battery tray from the base frameꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

Installing

4ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws that secure

the battery mount brackets to the base frameꢀ

1ꢀ Install battery tray onto base frameꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the battery mount bracketsꢀ

2ꢀ Secure the rear of the battery tray to battery mount

brackets with existing locknutsꢀ Torque to 160-inch

poundsꢀ

Spacer

Battery Mount

Bracket

3ꢀ Secure the front of the battery tray to the base frame

withexistingmountingscrewsandlocknutsꢀTorque

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Mounting

Screws

4ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING BATTERY BOX - GROUP 22 BATTERY BASE

FRAMES in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Base

Frame

Locknuts

Bolts

*Rubber Element

(or Shock Assembly)

*NOTE: Illustration depicts rubber elementꢀ Battery

Mount Brackets remove in the same manner for the

shock assemblyꢀ

FIGURE 3 - REMOVING GROUP 22 COMPONENTS

*Rubber

Element

Installing Group 24 Com ponents (FIGURE 4)

Base

Frame

1ꢀ Line up the mounting holes in the front of the NEW

battery box sub-frame and the NEW wiring harness

w/bracket with the mounting holes in the base frame

(FIGURE5)ꢀ

Battery Tray

*NOTE:IllustrationdepictstherubberelementꢀBatteryBox

Tray removes in the same manner for shock assemblyꢀ

2ꢀ Installthetwo(2)mountingscrewsthroughthewiring

harness w/bracket, battery box sub-frame, and base

frame (FIGURE 5)ꢀ

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GROUP 22

BATTERY BOX TRAY

3ꢀ InstallthelocknutsontomountingscrewsꢀTorqueto

160-inch pounds (FIGURE 5)ꢀ

EQUIPMENT OPTION

CONVERTING GROUP 22 BATTERY

BOX TRAY TO GROUP 24 BATTERY

BOX SUB FRAMA ASSEMBLY

WARNING

The Ba tte ry Bo x Re ta ine r/ Re ta ine r Clip

MUST b e fa ste ne d se c ure ly in p la c e b e -

fore using the whe e lc ha ir. Use Loc tite 242

a nd to rq ue to 160-inc h p o und s.

Rem oving Group 22 Com ponents (FIGURE 3)

4ꢀ Position the retainer clip between the NEW battery box

sub-frame and the top of the rubber element or shock

assemblymakingsuretheretainerclipmountingholeis

towards the bottom and the closed end of the clip is

againstthebatteryboxretainerbar (FIGURE5)ꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the battery boxꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX/BATTERIES

in PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the battery box trayꢀ Refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLINGTHEGROUP22BATTERYBOXTRAY

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

NOTE: Make sure the closed end of the battery box re-

tainer clip is pointing upꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the wiring harnessꢀ Refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLING THE WIRING HARNESS in PROCE-

DURE 10 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Install the mounting screw that secures the retainer

clip to the battery box sub-frameꢀ Use Loctite^®242

and torque to 160-inch pounds (FIGURE 5)ꢀ

NOTE:Thebatteryboxtrayandthebatterymountbracketswill

not be reusedꢀ Mounting screws and spacers will be reusedꢀ

6ꢀ Line up the NEW battery box retainer bar and spacers

with mounting holes in the base frame (FIGURE 5)ꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

7ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screws that secure the bat-

tery box retainer bar to the base frameꢀ Use Loctite

242 and torque to 160-inch pounds (FIGURE 5)ꢀ

SHOCK REPLACEMENT (FIGURE 5)

1ꢀ Removethegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX or INSTALLING/REMOVING

GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

8ꢀ Perform STEPS 2-7 of REMOVING/INSTALLING

THEWIRINGHARNESS inPROCEDURE10ofthis

manual to complete the wiring harness installationꢀ

9ꢀ Install the group 24 battery boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALL-

ING/REMOVING GROUP 24 BATTERYBOXES in

PROCEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Removethedrive wheel from the wheel hubꢀRefer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEDRIVEWHEELSin

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ GROUP 24 BATTERIES ONLY - Loosen the hex

screw that secures the battery box retainer bar to the

base frameꢀ

STEPS 1 - 3

Wiring Harness

Mounting

w/Bracket

Screws

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the top of

the shock to the base frameꢀ

Battery Box

Sub-Frame

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screwand locknut from the bot-

tom of the suspension armꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the shock from the base frameꢀ

7ꢀ Install the NEW shockꢀ

REAR OF

CHAIR

Base

Frame

8ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following sections:

FRONT OF

CHAIR

Locknuts

Aꢀ GROUP 24 BATTERIES -

✪ Position retainer clip between shock and bat-

teryboxsub-framemakingsuretheretainerclip

mounting hole is towards the bottom and the

closedendofclipisagainstbatteryboxretainer

barꢀ

STEPS 4 - 7

Battery Box

FRONT OF

CHAIR

✪ Secure the top of shock and retainer clip

to base frameꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and torque

to 160-inch poundsꢀ

✪ Apply Loctite 242 and torque the hex screw

that secures the battery box retainer bar to

the base frame to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Bꢀ GROUP 22 BATTERIES - Secure the top of

shock to base frameꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and

torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

REAR OF

CHAIR

9ꢀ Secure the bottom of the new shock to the sus-

pension arm with the existing mounting screw and

locknutꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch

poundsꢀ

Mounting Screws

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

10ꢀ Install the drive wheel from the wheel hubꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEDRIVEWHEELSin

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Spacer

11ꢀ Removethegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX or INSTALLING/REMOVING

GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

Retainer

Clip

Shock Assembly

(or Rubber Element)

Closed End

FIGURE 4 -INSTALLING GROUP 24 COMPONENTS

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

TOP OF SHOCK

GROUP 24 BATTERIES

GROUP 22 BATTERIES

Battery Box

Sub-frame

FRONT OF

CHAIR

Shock

REAR OF

CHAIR

Mounting Screw

(LOOSEN)

Mounting

Screw

Spacer

Suspension

Arm

Retainer Clip

(Closed End)

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

Top of

Shock

NOTE: Suspension arm for conventional motor shown,

Shock removes in the same manner for gearless/

brushless motor,

BOTTOM OF SHOCK

GROUP 22 AND GROUP 24 BATTERIES

Locknut

Shock

Mounting

Screw

Suspension

Arm

NOTE: Suspension arm shown is for conventional motors, Shock removes in the same manner for gearless/

brushless motor,

FIGURE 5 - SHOCK REPLACEMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

GROUP 22 BATTERIES

SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

(FIGURE 6)

Shock

1ꢀ Removethegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX or INSTALLING/REMOVING

GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ GROUP 24 BATTERIES ONLY- Loosen the mount-

ing screwthatsecuresthebatteryboxretainer bartothe

base frameꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the top of

the shock to the suspension armꢀ

Mounting

Screw

4ꢀ Swing the top of the shock rearwardꢀ

5ꢀ Hold the spring retainer and turn the shock eyelet as-

sembly counterclockwise to unthread it from the shockꢀ

Suspension

Arm

6ꢀ Remove the spring retainer and springꢀ

7ꢀ Place the NEW spring onto the shockꢀ

NOTE: Shock exploded away for clarity, There is no

need to remove shock from suspension arm,

8ꢀ Reinstall the shock eyelet assembly and the spring re-

tainer onto the NEW springꢀ

GROUP 24 BATTERIES

9ꢀ Whileholdingthespringretainer,torquetheshockeyelet

assembly to 245-inch poundsꢀ

10ꢀ Positiontheretainerclipbetweentheshockandthebat-

teryboxsub-framemakingsuretheretainerclipmount-

ingholeistowardsthebottomandtheclosedendofthe

clip is against the battery box retainerꢀ

Spacer

Hex

Screws

11ꢀ Secure top of shock and retainer clip to base frameꢀ

Apply Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Battery Box

Retainer

Bar

12ꢀ GROUP 24 BATTERIES ONLY - Apply Loctite 242

and torque the hex screw that secures the battery box

retainer bar to the base frame to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Retainer Clip

Shock Eyelet

Assembly

13ꢀ Reinstallthegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/REMOVING GROUP

22 BATTERY BOX or INSTALLING/REMOVING

GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

Spring

Retainer

Shock Eyelet

Assembly

Shock

Spring

Base

Shock

FIGURE 6 - SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

RUBBER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT

(FIGURE 7)

EQUIPMENT OPTION

CONVERTING TORQUE AND X

RUBBER ELEMENTS TO ARROW

SHOCKS (FIGURE 8)

NOTE: Rubber elements are only found on Storm

Torque and Storm X wheelchairs,

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxtrayꢀRefer toREMOVINGTHE

BATTERY BOX TRAY in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

2ꢀ RemovetheexistingTorqueand XrubberelementꢀRe-

fer to RUBBER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT -

TORQUEANDXBASEFRAMESinthisprocedure of

the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Loosen the mounting screw that secures the battery

mount bracket to the base frame, but do not removeꢀ

3ꢀ Line up the bottom of the new Storm Arrow shock with

the BOTTOM hole in the rubber element mount plateꢀ

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw that secures the top of

the rubber element and battery mount bracket to the

base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Install the new hex screw and locknut through the bot-

tom hole of the mount bracket and shockꢀ Torque to

160-inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the three (3) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure the bottom of the rubber element to the rub-

ber element mount bracketꢀ

NOTE: The original hardware that secured the BOTTOM of

theTorqueandXrubberelementtotheshockmountbracket

willnotbeusedwiththisoption, Keepforfutureuse,

7ꢀ Removetheexistingrubberelementandinstallthenew

rubber elementꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstallthehexscrewthatsecuresthetopoftheshock

assemblyandbatterymount brackettothebaseframeꢀ

Use Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

8ꢀ Resecure the bottom of the rubber element to the rub-

ber element mount bracket with the existing three (3)

mounting screwsꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque to 160-

inch poundsꢀ

6ꢀ Torque the hex screw that secures the battery mount

bracket to the base frame to 160-inch poundsꢀ

9ꢀ Reinstall the hex screw that secures the top of the rub-

berelementandbatterymountbrackettothebaseframeꢀ

Use Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

7ꢀ Reinstall the battery box tray onto the battery mount

bracket and torque the locknut to 160-inch poundsꢀ

8ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

10ꢀ Torque the hex screw that secures the battery mount

bracket to the base frame to 160-inch poundsꢀ

11ꢀ Reinstall the battery box tray onto the hanger bracket

and torque the locknut to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Hex Screw

Shock

12ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOV-

ING GROUP 22 BATTERYBOX in PROCEDURE 9

of this manualꢀ

Battery Mount

Bracket

Spacer

Battery Mount

Bracket

Mounting

Screw

Base

Frame

Mounting Screw

FIGURE 8 - CONVERTING TORQUE AND X RUBBER

ELEMENTS TO ARROW SHOCKS

(LOOSEN)

Rubber Element

FIGURE 7 - RUBBER ELEMENT REPLACEMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

REMOVING/ INSTALLING

GEARBOX

(FIGURE 10)

5/16-18 x

2-1/2-inch

Hex

5/16-18 x

1-1/4-inch

Hex

C AUTIO N

Screws

Pe rform the following p roc e d ure in a d e s-

ig na te d work a re a to p re ve nt d a m a g e to

flooring (c a rp e ting , tile , e tc .).

Rem oving

Suspension

Arm

1ꢀ Remove the drive wheels from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Gearbox

2ꢀ Remove the drive wheel hub from the existing gearbox

drive shaftꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE

WHEEL HUBS in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

NOTE: Note mounting position of gearbox to suspension

arm before disassembly,

Motor

FIGURE 10 - REMOVING/INSTALLING GEARBOX

NOTE: To reposition the gearbox on the suspension arm,

refer to WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION in this procedure of the

manual,

ADJ USTING WEIGHT

DISTRIBUTION (FIGURE 11)

3ꢀ Removethefour(4)hexscrewsthatsecuretheexisting

motor/gearbox to the suspension armꢀ

4ꢀ RemoveexistingmotorfromgearboxꢀRefertoMOTOR

REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

NOTE: Seat mount plates and seat support brackets al-

lowtheseatframetoberepositionedalongthebaseframe,

The range is determined by position of the seat stop

screws, Thefrontseatstopscrewispositionedat4-inches

and the rear seat stop screw is positioned at 10-inches,

Both seat stop screw positions are measured from the

front of the base frame,

5ꢀ InstallexistingmotorontonewgearboxꢀRefertoMOTOR

REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Installing

NOTE: The position of the seat support brackets is factory

set at 7-inches, this measured from the front of the base

frame to the front of the seat support bracket, This will put

about 70% of the total weight of the chair and user over the

large wheels, However, this setting may not be the most de-

sirable in terms of maneuverability, front rigging clearance

and comfort for the user,

C AUTIO N

The REAR he x sc re ws tha t se c ure the g e a r-

b ox to the susp e nsion a rm MUST b e 5/ 16-

18 x 2-1/ 2-inc he s long a nd the FRONT he x

sc re ws tha t se c ure the g e a rb ox to the sus-

pe nsion a rm MUST be 5/ 16-18 x 1-1/ 4-inc he s

lo ng . Othe rwise d a m a g e to the g e a rb o x

c a sting c a n re sult.

Adjustm ent Options

NOTE: This section will provide the user with some knowl-

edgeofwhattoexpectifthefollowingadjustmentsaremade,

1ꢀ Position NEW gearbox with noted mounting holesꢀ

1ꢀ Movingtheseatforwardꢀ

2ꢀ When reassembling gearbox to suspension arm, use

Loctite242andtorquehexscrewsto160-inchpoundsꢀ

Advantage:

This adjustment allows more clear-

anceforfrontriggingsandamorestable

“feel” for the userꢀ

NOTE: Replace any parts that show signs of wear or dam-

age,

Disadvantage: Moreweightisputonfrontcastersand

makes turning more difficultꢀ

3ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel hub to the new gearbox

driveshaftꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVE

WHEEL HUBS in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

NOTE: This option can also be accomplished by moving

the motor backward on the suspension arm, Refer to RE-

POSITIONINGGEARBOX inthisprocedureofthemanual,

4ꢀ ReinstallthedrivewheelsontothewheelchairꢀReferto

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELSinPRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

MOTOR/GEARBOX ASSEMBLY

2ꢀ Movingtheseatrearwardꢀ

Advantage:

Makesturningeasierandprovidebet-

ter traction for the large wheelsꢀ

Standard -

Approximately 65% of

weight over rear

wheels

1 - Inch Forward -

Approximately 70% of

weight over rear

wheels

Disadvantage: Thisadjustment,however, allowsless

clearanceforfrontriggingsandtheuser

will experience more engagement of

theanti-tippersꢀ

NOTE: This option can also be accomplished by moving

the motor forward on the suspension arm$ Refer to REPO-

SITIONING GEARBOX in this procedure of the manual$

Adjusting Weight Distribution Procedure

1ꢀ Loosen the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

seat support brackets to the base frameꢀ

WARNING

DO NOT a djust se a t be yond limit stops.

2 - Inch Forward -

2ꢀ Adjust seat forward or back to the position determined Approximately 75% of

fromtheprevioussectionADJUSTMENTOPTIONSꢀ

weight over rear

wheels

3ꢀ Retighten the four (4) mounting screws securing the

seat support brackets to the base frameꢀ

4ꢀ Testwheelchairmaneuverability,comfort,andhandlingꢀ

5ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-4 for further adjustment, if necessaryꢀ

FIGURE 12 - REPOSITIONING MOTOR/GEARBOX

Mounting Screws

WARNING

Whe n using a re c line r/ hig h b a c k va n se a t,

the motor/ ge a rbox or motor MUST use most

REARWARD m ounting hole s on the susp e n-

sion a rm a sse mbly.

Washer

Seat Support

Bracket

1ꢀ Determine the desired position for the gearbox on the

wheelchairꢀ

Base

Frame

2ꢀ Remove the drive wheels from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

FIGURE 11 - ADJUSTING WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION

3ꢀ Remove gearbox from the suspension armꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthisprocedure

of the manualꢀ

REPOSITIONING THE MOTOR/

GEARBOX (FIGURE 12)

4ꢀ Move gearbox to the position determine in STEP 1ꢀ

NOTE: The motor/gearbox assembly can be repositioned to

lengthen or shorten the wheelbase by 2-inches in 1-inch in-

crements$

NOTE:Ifthewheelchairisequippedwith9-inchcastersona

standardorheavydutybase,the2-inchforwardpositionCAN

NOT be utilized$

STANDARDPOSITION-LENGTHENSthewheelbaseand

gives you the most stability and standard maneuverabilityꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstallthegearboxontotheexistingsuspensionarmꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthispro-

cedure of the manualꢀ

1 - INCH FORWARD - CENTERS the wheelbase and gives

you standard stability and maneuverabilityꢀ

6ꢀ Repeat STEPS 3-5 for opposite side of the wheelchairꢀ

2 - INCH FORWARD - SHORTENS the wheelbase and in-

creases maneuverability and distributes additional weight on

rear wheelsꢀ

7ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

REPOSITIONING THE GEARLESS/ BRUSHLESS MOTOR (FIGURE 13,14)

Acceptable m ounting positions for the gearless/ brushless m otor.

NOTE: The motor/gearbox assembly or gearless/brushless motor can be repositioned to lengthen or shorten the wheel-

base by 2-inches in 1-inch increments$

ARROW AND STORM X

TORQUE

NOTE: These mounting positions apply to the Arrow

and Storm X with fixed back or recliner and torque

with manual recline option

NOTE:These mounting positions apply to the Torque

with fixed back$

STANDARD POSITION - LENGTHENS the wheel-

base and gives you the most stability and standard

maneuverabilityꢀ

STANDARDPOSITION-SHORTENSthewheelbaseand

increases maneuverability and distributes additional weight

on rear wheelsꢀ

1-INCH REARWARD - CENTERS the wheelbase and

gives you standard stability and maneuverabilityꢀ

1-INCH FORWARD - CENTERS the wheelbase and

gives you standard stability and maneuverabilityꢀ

2-INCH REARWARD - LENGTHENS the wheelbase

and gives you the most stability and standard maneu-

verabilityꢀ

2-INCH FORWARD - SHORTENS the wheelbase and

increases maneuverability and distributes additional

weight on rear wheelsꢀ

Standard -

Approximately65%

of weight over

rear wheels

2 - Inch Rearward -

Approximately65%

of weight over

rear wheels

1 - Inch Rearward -

Approximately70%

of weight over

1 - Inch Forward -

Approximately70%

2 - Inch Forward -

Approximately75%

of weight over

rear wheels

of weight over

rear wheels

Standard -

rear wheels

Approximately75%

of weight over

rear wheels

FIGURE 13 - REPOSITIONING THE GEARLESS/BRUSHLESS MOTOR

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

1ꢀ Determine the desired mounting position of the gear- 10ꢀ Reinstall thedrivewheel to the wheelchairꢀ Refer to RE-

less/brushless motorꢀ Refer to ACCEPTABLE

MOUNTING POSITIONS FOR THE GEARLESS/

BRUSHLESS MOTOR in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

MOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in PROCE-

DURE 12 of this manualꢀ

11ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-9 for opposite side of wheelchairꢀ

12ꢀ If necessary, reinstallthebatteryboxtrayꢀ Refer toRE-

MOVING THE BATTERY BOX TRAY in this proce-

dure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Removethegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERY

BOX-GROUP22 BATTERYBASE FRAMES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGBATTERYBOXES-GROUP

24BATTERYBASE FRAMESinPROCEDURE9of

this manualꢀ

13ꢀ Removethegroup22batteryboxorgroup24battery

boxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/REMOVINGBATTERY

BOX-GROUP22 BATTERYBASE FRAMES or IN-

STALLING/REMOVINGBATTERYBOXES-GROUP

24BATTERYBASE FRAMESinPROCEDURE9of

this manualꢀ

3ꢀ If necessary, removethe batteryboxtrayꢀ Refer to RE-

MOVING THE BATTERY BOX TRAY in this proce-

dure of the manualꢀ

REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM FOR

WHEELCHAIRS WITH MOTOR/

GEARBOX ASSEMBLY (FIGURE 15)

4ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELSinPROCE-

DURE 12 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Loosen the adjustment screw that secures the motor

release handle to the brake release shaftꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the drive wheels from the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELSinPROCE-

DURE 12 of this manualꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws and washers

that secure the motor to the suspension armꢀ

2ꢀ Loosen the hex screws that secure wiring harness to

sub-frame assemblyꢀ

7ꢀ Slide the motor forward or backward to the desired

mountingpositionꢀ

3ꢀ Remove gearbox from the existing suspension armꢀ Re-

fertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthisproce-

dureofthemanualꢀ

8ꢀ Securethemotortothemountingpositiondetermined

inSTEP1andsecurewiththefour(4)existingmount-

ing screws and washersꢀ Torque to 13 foot/poundsꢀ

4ꢀ Remove plug buttons from the middle of the base frameꢀ

9ꢀ Securely tighten adjustment screwꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the hex screws and the beveled washers that

secure the suspension arm assembly to the base frameꢀ

Motor

Brake Release

Shaft

Motor Release

Lever

6ꢀ Remove existing suspension arm from the wheelchairꢀ

NOTE: When installing the NEW suspension arm, the

beveled washers MUST be placed on the inside and out-

side of the base frame, with the bevels facing each other$

Adjustment

Screw

7ꢀ Install the NEW suspension arm assembly onto the

base frameꢀ

Suspension Arm

Beveled

Washers

Plug

Button

Suspension Arm

Mounting

Screws

Washer

Suspension Arm Hex Screw

(1/2 x 7-inches)

FIGURE 14 - REPOSITIONING THE GEARLESS/

BRUSHLESS MOTOR

FIGURE 15 - REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM FOR

WHEELCHAIRS WITH MOTOR/GEARBOX ASSEMBLY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 16

8ꢀ Torquesuspensionarmhexscrews(1/2x7-inches)to

85 FOOT pounds (approximately 1,020-inch pounds)

and replace plug buttonsꢀ

12ꢀ Install the shock onto the new suspension armꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING THE SHOCK ASSEM-

BLYin this procedure of the manualꢀ

9ꢀ Reinstallthegearboxontotheexistingsuspensionarmꢀ

RefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOXinthis

procedure of the manualꢀ

13ꢀ Install the motor onto the new suspension armꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING THE MOTOR in PRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

10ꢀ Tighten the hex screws that secure wiring harness to

sub-frame assembly securelyꢀ

14ꢀ Install anti-tip assembly onto the rear of the new sus-

pensionarmꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE

ANTI-TIPASSEMBLYinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

11ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELSinPRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

15ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Aꢀ Remove the seating systemꢀ Refer to the seating

systems owner’s manual for removal/installation

instructionsꢀ

12ꢀ RepeatSTEPS1-12fortheoppositesideofthewheel-

chair, if necessaryꢀ

Bꢀ Remove the seat panꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLINGTHESEATPANinPROCEDURE6of

this manualꢀ

REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM

FOR WHEELCHAIRS WITH

GEARLESS/ BRUSHLESS MOTORS

(FIGURE 16)

Suspension Arm

1ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Beveled

Washers

Aꢀ Remove the seating systemꢀ Refer to the seating

systems owner’s manual for removal/installation

instructionsꢀ

Plug

Button

Bꢀ Remove the seat panꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLINGTHESEATPANinPROCEDURE6of

this manualꢀ

Suspension Arm Hex Screw

(1/2 x 7-inches)

2ꢀ RemovethemotorꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLING

THE MOTOR in PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ Cut the tie-wrap(s) that secure the wiring harness/

charger cable to the suspension armꢀ

FIGURE 16 - REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM FOR

WHEELCHAIRS WITH GEARLESS/BRUSHLESS MOTOR

4ꢀ Removetheanti-tipassemblyfromtherearofthesus-

pensionarmꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLINGTHE

ANTI-TIPASSEMBLYinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

ANTI-TIPPER WHEEL

REPLACEMENT (FIGURE 9)

5ꢀ Remove the shock from the suspension armꢀ Refer to

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHESHOCKASSEMBLY

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the locknuts, hex screws and spacers that

securetheanti-tipperwheelstotheshockmountplatesꢀ

2ꢀ Replace anti-tipper wheel(s) and torque existing hard-

ware to 30-35-inch poundsꢀ DO NOT overtightenꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the plug buttons from the side of the base

frameꢀ

Anti-Tipper Wheel

Locknut

7ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and beveled washers

thatsecurethefrontofthesuspensionarmtothebase

frameꢀ

8ꢀ Remove the existing suspension arm from the base

frameꢀ

9ꢀ Install the new suspension arm onto the base frameꢀ

Spacer

10ꢀ Install mounting screw and beveled washers that se-

curethefrontofthesuspensionarmtothebaseframeꢀ

Shock Mount Plates

FIGURE 9 - ANTI-TIPPER WHEEL REPLACEMENT

Hex Screw

11ꢀ Install the plug buttons into the side of the base frame

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 16

RWD WHEELCHAIRS

2ꢀ Secure top of anti-tip bracket to suspension arm with

existing mounting screw, washers, spacers, and lock-

nutꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING THE

ANTI-TIP ASSEMBLY

Rem oving

3ꢀ Alignlowermountingholeoftheanti-tipmountingbracket

with the lower slot of the suspension armꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washers, and spacers

that secure the top of the anti-tip bracket to the suspen-

sion armꢀ

4ꢀ Secure the anti-tip bracket to the suspension arm

with the existing mounting screw, washers, spac-

ers, and locknutsꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and locknut that secure

the extension spring in placeꢀ

5ꢀ Hook one end of the extension spring around

mounting screwꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washers, and spacers

that secure the bottom of the anti-tip bracket to the sus-

pension armꢀ

6ꢀ Install mounting screw through lower mounting

hole in suspension arm, other end of extension

spring and opposite side of suspension armꢀ Se-

curely tighten with locknutꢀ

Installing

1ꢀ Aligntopmountingholeofanti-tipbracketwithtopmount-

ing slot in rear of suspension armꢀ

Top

Mounting

Hole

Anti-Tip

Bracket

Spacers

Washers

Locknuts

DO NOT

USE THIS

MOUNTING

HOLE

Locknut

DO NOT

USE THIS

MOUNTING

HOLE

Lower

Mounting

Hole

Extension

Spring

Lower

Mounting

Hole

Mounting

Screws

Suspension

Arm

DO NOT

USE THIS

MOUNTING

SLOT

Lower

Mounting Mounting

DO NOT use this mounting hole$ This

mounting hole is used to secure the

shock assembly$

Slot

Screw

NOTE: Suspension arm shown is for gearless/brushless motor$ The Anti-tip assembly removes/installs in the

same manner on the suspension arm used with the conventional motor/gearbox assembly$

FIGURE 17 - REMOVING/INSTALLING THE ANTI-TIP ASSEMBLY

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

REMOVING/ INSTALLING FRONT

SHROUD (FIGURE 2)

This Procedure includes the following:

Removing/Installing Rear Shroud

Removing/Installing Front Shroud

Removing/Installing Side Shroud Assembly

Removing/Installing Counterweight

Replacing Group 24 Battery Box Sub-Frame

Removing/Installing Shocks

Rem oving

1ꢀ Turn the two (2) wing nuts on the TOP of the front

shroud COUNTERCLOCKWISEꢀ

2ꢀ TurnthewingnutontheBOTTOMofthefrontshroud

COUNTERCLOCKWISE and lift up on the front

shroudꢀ

Shock Spring Replacement

Installing

Tie Rod Replacement

1ꢀ Position the front shroud on the wheelchair frameꢀ

Removing/Installing Gearbox

2ꢀ Align the wing nut onthe BOTTOM of the front shroud

with the mounting bracket on the wheelchair frameꢀ

Sensor Cable Assembly Replacement

Replacing Suspension Arm

3ꢀ Align the two (2) wing nuts on the TOP of the front

shroudwiththemountingholesinthewheelchairframeꢀ

Removing/Installing The Wiring Harness

Adjusting Weight Distribution

4ꢀ TurnthewingnutontheBOTTOMofthefrontshroud

CLOCKWISE to secure front shroud in placeꢀ

WARNING

5ꢀ Turn the two (2) wing nuts on the TOP of the front

shroudCLOCKWISEtosecurefrontshroudinplaceꢀ

Afte r ANY a d justm e nts, re p a ir o r se rvic e

a nd BEFORE use , m a ke sure tha t a ll a t-

ta c hing ha rd wa re is tig hte ne d se c ure ly -

o the rwise injury o r d a m a g e m a y re sult.

REMOVING/ INSTALLING REAR

SHROUD (FIGURE 1)

Wing Nut

Rem oving

Front

1ꢀ Turn the two (2) wing nuts COUNTERCLOCKWISE

and lift up on the rear shroudꢀ

Shroud

Installing

Mounting

Bracket

1ꢀ Position the rear shroud on the wheelchair frame align-

ing the two (2) wing nuts with the mounting bracketsꢀ

2ꢀ Turn the two (2) wing nuts CLOCKWISE to secure

rear shroud in placeꢀ

Wing Nut

FIGURE 2 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING FRONT

SHRO UD

Wing

Nut

Wing

Nut

REMOVING/ INSTALLING SIDE

SHROUD ASSEMBLY (FIGURE 3)

Rem oving

Rear

Shroud

1ꢀ RemovetherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer

toREMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELinPRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

FIGURE 1 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING REAR

SHRO UD

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) socket screws that secure the

side shroud bracket to the suspension armꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING

COUNTERWEIGHT (FIGURE 4)

4ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and washer that se-

cures the REAR of the side shroud to the suspension

armꢀ

WARNING

The se nsor on the whe e lc ha ir should p re -

ve nt the whe e lc ha ir from op e ra ting with-

out the c ounte rwe ig ht se c ure d to the re a r

o f the whe e lc ha ir. If the whe e lc ha ir op e r-

a te s without the c ounte rwe ight, DO NOT op-

e ra te the whe e lc ha ir. Ha ve the whe e lc ha ir

se rvic e d by a de a le r or qua lifie d te c hnic ia n.

5ꢀ Remove the side shroud assemblyꢀ

Installing

1ꢀ Position the side shroud on the wheelchair frameꢀ

2ꢀ Install the two (2) socket screws that secure the side

shroud bracket into the mounting holes of the sus-

pension armꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

The c ounte rwe ig ht we ig hs 42 p ound s. Use

p rop e r lifting te c hniq ue s (lift with your le g s)

to a void injury.

3ꢀ Install the mounting screw and washer that secures

the REAR of the side shroud to the suspension armꢀ

Rem oving

4ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-3 for the opposite side shroud as-

sembly, if necessaryꢀ

1ꢀ RemovetherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer

toREMOVING/INSTALLINGDRIVEWHEELinPRO-

CEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ While using proper lifting techniques, use ONE hand

to firmly grasp the handle and the OTHER hand to

firmly grasp the OUTSIDE LOWER EDGE of the

counterweightꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

3ꢀ Pull the outside lower edge toward you, releasing the

bottom shoulder screws on the counterweight from the

bottom slots in the mounting bracketsꢀ

Front

Mounting

Hole

Rear

Mounting

Hole

Socket

Screws

4ꢀ Lift the counterweight up and remove the top shoulder

screws from the top slots in the mounting bracketsꢀ

Mounting

Screw

Installing

1ꢀ While using proper lifting techniques, use ONE hand

to firmly grasp the handle and the OTHER hand to

firmly grasp the OUTSIDE LOWER EDGE of the

counterweightꢀ

Washer

2ꢀ Hold the counterweight at an angle (DETAIL “C”) and

positionthetopshoulderscrewsintothetopslotsonthe

mounting bracketsꢀ

3ꢀ Lowerthecounterweightdownuntilthebottomshoulder

screwsengageinthebottomslotsonthemountingbrack-

etsꢀ

Suspension Arm

Side Shroud Bracket

4ꢀ Push in the bottom rear of the counterweight to se-

cure the counterweight to the wheelchair until it locks

into place (DETAIL“A”)ꢀ

FIGURE 3 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING SIDE

SHROUD ASSEMBLY

5ꢀ InstalltherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

INGREARSHROUDinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

DETAIL “A” - REMOVING - STEP 2;

INSTALLING - STEP 5

REPLACING GROUP 24 BATTERY

BOX SUB-FRAME (FIGURE 5)

Handle

Rem oving

1ꢀ RemovetherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ RemovethecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

INGCOUNTERWEIGHTinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

3ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Outside

LowerEdge

4ꢀ Cut tie wrap A, which secures the sensor cable AND

Counterweight

the LEFT motor cable to the battery box sub-frameꢀ

5ꢀ Cut tie-wrap B, which secures the battery charger cable

DETAIL “B” - REMOVING - STEP 3;

ANDtheRIGHTmotorcabletothebatteryboxsub-frameꢀ

INSTALLING - STEPS 3, 4

6ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts

that secure the wiring harness w/bracket to the bat-

tery box sub-frameꢀ

Mounting Bracket

7ꢀ Remove the wiring harness w/bracket from the bat-

tery box sub-frameꢀ

8ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws and washers

that secure the battery box sub-frame to the mount-

ing bracketsꢀ

Counterweight

9ꢀ Remove the EXISTING sub-frame assemblyꢀ

10ꢀ Remove the four (4) mounting screws and wash-

ers that secure the two (2) mounting brackets to

the sub-frameꢀ

Bottom

Slot

Bottom Shoulder Screw

11ꢀ Install the four (4) mounting screws and washers

that secure the two (2) NEW mounting brackets

to the sub-frameꢀ

DETAIL “C” - REMOVING - STEP 4;

INSTALLING - STEP 2

Counterweight

Top Slot in

12ꢀ Install the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

NEW battery box sub-frame to the mounting brack-

etsꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque mounting screws to

156-inch poundsꢀ

Mounting

Bracket

Top Shoulder

Screw

13ꢀ Install the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts that

secure the wiring harness w/bracket to the NEW bat-

teryboxsub-frameꢀUseLoctite242andtorquemount-

ing screws to 160-inch poundsꢀ

14ꢀ Secure the sensor cable AND the LEFT motor cable

to the NEW battery box sub-frame using tie wrap Aꢀ

Refer to FIGURE 5 for tie wrap positioningꢀ

Bottom Shoulder Screw

15ꢀ Secure the battery charger cable AND the RIGHT

motor cable to the NEW battery box sub-frame using

tiewrapBꢀRefertoFIGURE5fortiewrappositioningꢀ

Bottom Slot in Mounting Bracket

FIGURE 4 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING

C O UNTERWEIG HT

16ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

17ꢀ ReinstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN- 18ꢀ Reinstall the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Mounting Screw

(STEPS 8 and 12)

Washer (STEP 8 and 12)

Battery Box

Sub-frame

Position

Tie Wrap

“A” Here

REAR OF

C HAIR

Wiring Harness

W/ Bracket

Mounting

Screw

(STEPS 10

Mounting

Bracket (Only

One (1) Shown

For Clarity)

Mounting

and 11)

Screw

(STEPS 6

and 13)

Locknut

Washer

(STEP 10

and 11)

Position

Tie Wrap

“B” Here

FRONT OF

C HAIR

Sub-Frame

FIGURE 5 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOX SUB-FRAME

Installing

REMOVING/ INSTALLING SHOCKS

(FIGURE 6)

1ꢀ Secure the top of the NEW shock to base frame us-

ing the existing washer and mounting screwꢀ Apply

Loctite 242 and torque to 156-inch poundsꢀ

Rem oving

1ꢀ Remove the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLINGFRONTSHROUDinthisprocedureofthe

manualꢀ

2ꢀ Secure the bottom of the NEW shock to the suspen-

sion arm with the existing mounting screw and lock-

nutꢀApplyLoctite242andtorqueto160-inchpoundsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

3ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ RemovethecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

4ꢀ ReinstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

4ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Reinstall the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the mounting screw and washer that se-

curesthetopoftheEXISTINGshocktothebaseframeꢀ

6ꢀ Reinstall the front shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING FRONT SHROUD in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

6ꢀ Removethemountingscrewandlocknutthatsecures

thebottomoftheEXISTINGshocktothesuspension

armꢀ

7ꢀ Remove the EXISTING shockꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

Base Frame 7ꢀ Securetopofshockandspringretainertobaseframeꢀ

Apply Loctite 242 and torque to 160-inch poundsꢀ

Washer

8ꢀ Reinstall the shockꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALL-

ING SHOCKS in this procedure of this manualꢀ

Mounting Screw

TIE ROD REPLACEMENT (FIGURE 8)

Rem oving

Shock

1ꢀ RemovethefrontshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

INGFRONTSHROUDinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

2ꢀ RemovetherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Suspension Arm

Mounting Screw

3ꢀ Remove the counterweightꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

4ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Locknut

5ꢀ RemovetheshocksꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING SHOCKS in this procedure of this manualꢀ

FIGURE 6 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING SHOCKS

6ꢀ Remove the MKIV controllerꢀ Refer to REMOVING/

INSTALLINGMKIVCONTROLLERinPROCEDURE

13 of this manualꢀ

SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

(FIGURE 7)

7ꢀ Removethelocknut, smallwasher, largerwasherand

mounting screw that secures the tie rod to the sus-

pension armꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the shockꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALL-

ING SHOCKS in this procedure of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Hold the spring retainer and turn the shock eyelet as-

semblycounterclockwisetounthreaditfromtheshockꢀ

8ꢀ Remove the locknut, small washer, large washer and

mountingscrewthatsecuresthetierodtothebaseframeꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the spring retainer and springꢀ

4ꢀ Place the NEW spring onto the shockꢀ

9ꢀ Remove the tie rod from the wheelchairꢀ

NOTE: In order to ensure that the replacement tie rod(s)

are adjusted properly, it is necessary to remove ALL

of the tie rods from the wheelchair and install both the

NEW and the EXISTING tie rods as described in the

section below:

5ꢀ Reinstall the shock eyelet assembly and the spring

retainer onto the NEW springꢀ

6ꢀ While holding the spring retainer, torque the shock

eyelet assembly to 245-inch poundsꢀ

10ꢀ Repeat STEPS 7-9 to remove the three (3) remain-

ing tie rodsꢀ

Spring

Retainer

Shock Eyelet

Assembly

Adjusting/ Installing

1ꢀ Before installing, adjust the collar on one (1) tie rod

until the length of the tie rod is approximately five (5)

inches (DETAIL“A)ꢀ

Spring

NOTE: The length of the tie-rod is measured from the

center of one eyelet to the center of the opposite eyelet:

Spring

Base

NOTE: Turn the collar CLOCKWISE to shorten the tie

rodandCOUNTER-CLOCKWISEtolengthenthetierod:

2ꢀ Lock the collar on the tie rod into place by turning

the nut on the tie rod until it is FLUSH against the

collar (DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

Shock

FIGURE 7 - SHOCK SPRING REPLACEMENT

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

3ꢀ Installthetierodontothebaseframeusingthemount- 8ꢀ Securelytightenthetierodstothebaseframe ANDto

ing screw, large washer, small washer and locknutꢀ

HANDTIGHTENONLYꢀ

the suspension armꢀ Apply Loctite 242 and torque to

360-inch poundsꢀ

4ꢀ Install the tie rod in the suspension arm using the 9ꢀ Reinstall the MKIV controllerꢀ Refer to REMOV-

mountingscrew, largewasher, smallwasherandlock-

nutꢀHANDTIGHTENONLYꢀ

ING/INSTALLING MKIV CONTROLLER in PRO-

CEDURE 13 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Repeat STEPS 1-4 to install the three (3) remain- 10ꢀ ReinstalltheshocksꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ing tie rodsꢀ ING SHOCKS in this procedure of this manualꢀ

NOTE: To complete proper tie rod adjustment, Per- 11ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

formSTEPS6-7ontheTOPTWO(2)tierodsONLY:

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

6ꢀ Turn the collar COUNTER-CLOCKWISE for one (1)

complete revolution on the TOP TWO (2) tie rodsꢀ

12ꢀ ReinstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

7ꢀ Lock the collar on the TOP TWO (2) tie rods into

place by turning the nuts on the TOP TWO (2) tie

rods until they are FLUSH against the collarsꢀ

13ꢀ ReinstalltherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

Center

5 inches

14ꢀ ReinstallthefrontshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

INGFRONTSHROUDinthisprocedureofthemanualꢀ

Tie Rod

Center

REMOVING/ INSTALLING

GEARBOX (FIGURE 9)

Nut

Collar

(Turn CLOCKWISE To

Shorten And COUNTER-

CLOCKWISE To Lengthen)

C AUTIO N

Pe rform the following p roc e d ure in a d e s-

ig na te d work a re a to p re ve nt d a m a g e to

flooring (c a rp e ting , tile , e tc .).

DETAIL “A”

Rem oving

1ꢀ Remove the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Base

Frame

2ꢀ RemovethecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

Mounting

Screw

3ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Tie Rod

Suspension

Arm

Locknut

4ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

Small

Washer

5ꢀ RemovethesideshroudassemblyꢀRefertoREMOV-

ING/INSTALLINGTHESIDESHROUDinthisproce-

dure of the manualꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the six (6) socket screws that secure the

existing motor/gearbox to the suspension armꢀ

Mounting

Screw

Large

Washer

7ꢀ Remove existing motor from gearboxꢀ Refer to MO-

TOR REPLACEMENT in PROCEDURE 12 of this

manualꢀ

Suspension Arm

FIGURE 8 - TIE ROD ASSEMBLIES

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

Installing

5ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

C AUTIO N

The long e r soc ke t sc re ws MUST b e p osi-

tione d in the m ounting hole s on the OUT-

SIDE of the suspe nsion a rm, a nd the SHORTER

soc ke t sc re ws MUST b e p ositione d in the

m ounting hole s on the INSIDE of the sus-

p e nsion a rm . Othe rwise , d a m a g e to the

g e a rb ox m a y re sult.

6ꢀ ReinstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

7ꢀ ReinstalltherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

1ꢀ Install the EXISTING motor onto the NEW gearboxꢀ

RefertoMOTORREPLACEMENT inPROCEDURE

12 of this manualꢀ

SENSOR CABLE ASSEMBLY

REPLACEMENT (FIGURE 10)

1ꢀ RemovetherearshroudꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALL-

ING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Secure the gearbox to the suspension arm using the

six (6) socket screwsꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque

the socket screws to 75-inch poundsꢀ

2ꢀ RemovethecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

NOTE: Replace any parts that show signs of wear or dam-

ageꢀ

3ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

3ꢀ ReinstallthesideshroudassemblyꢀRefertoREPLAC-

ING THE SIDE SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

4ꢀ Cut tie-wrap A, which secures the EXISTING sensor

cable to the sensor bracket (DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

4ꢀ Reinstall the drive wheels onto the wheelchairꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Cut tie-wrap B, which secures the EXISTING sensor

cable AND the LEFT motor cable to the battery box

sub-frame (DETAIL”B”)ꢀ

LONG

Socket

6ꢀ Cut tie-wrap C, which secures the EXISTING “Lego”

block connector of the sensor cable and the “Lego”

block connector of the battery wiring harness to the

base frameꢀ

Suspension

Screw

SHORT

Arm

Socket

Screw

7ꢀ DisconnecttheEXISTING“Lego”blockconnectorof

the sensor cable from the “Lego” block connector of

the battery wiring harness (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

]

8ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws, washers and

locknutsthatsecuretheEXISTINGsensortothesen-

sor bracket (DETAIL “D”)ꢀ

Motor

9ꢀ Remove the EXISTING sensor cable assemblyꢀ

10ꢀ Installthetwo(2)mountingscrews, washersandlock-

nuts to secure the NEW sensor to the sensor bracket

(DETAIL “D”)ꢀ Securely tightenꢀ

Gearbox

FIGURE 9 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING

G EARBO X

11ꢀ ConnecttheNEW“Lego”blockconnectorofthesen-

sor cable assembly to the “Lego” block connector of

the wiring harness (DETAIL ‘C”)ꢀ

12ꢀ Secure the two (2) “Lego” block connectors to the

base frame with a NEW tie wrap (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

13ꢀ Secure the NEW sensor cable AND the LEFT motor

cable to the battery box sub-frame with a NEW tie

wrap (DETAIL”B”)ꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

14ꢀ Secure the NEW sensor cable to the sensor bracket 16ꢀ ReinstallthecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

with a NEW tie wrap (DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

15ꢀ Reinstall the battery boxesꢀ Refer to INSTALLING/

REMOVINGGROUP24BATTERYBOXESinPRO- 17ꢀ Reinstall the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Sensor

Bracket

Base Frame

“Lego”

Block

Sensor

Cable

Connector

Of The

Battery

Sensor

Wiring

Cable

Harness

Base

Frame

Tie Wrap A

DETAIL “A”

Tie Wrap C

Battery Box

Sub-Frame

DETAIL “C”

FRONT OF

CHAIR

Locknut

Sensor

Bracket

REAR OF

CHAIR

Tie Wrap B

Battery

Box Sub-

Frame

Sensor

Washer

LEFT Motor

Sensor

Cable

Mounting

Screw

Cable

DETAIL “B”

DETAIL “D”

NOTE: Seat frame and drive wheels removed for clarification purposes ONLYꢀ

FIGURE 10 - SENSOR CABLE ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT

2ꢀ RemovethecounterweightꢀRefertoREMOVING/IN-

STALLING COUNTERWEIGHT in this procedure of

the manualꢀ

REPLACING SUSPENSION ARM

(FIGURE 11)

1ꢀ Remove the rear shroudꢀ Refer to REMOVING/IN-

STALLING REAR SHROUD in this procedure of the

manualꢀ

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

3ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

REMOVING/ INSTALLING WIRING

HARNESS (FIGURE 12)

Rem oving

4ꢀ Remove the drive wheel from the wheelchairꢀ Refer

to REMOVING/INSTALLING DRIVE WHEELS in

PROCEDURE 12 of this manualꢀ

1ꢀ RemovethebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

5ꢀ Remove the shockꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALL-

ING SHOCKS in this procedure of this manualꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws that secure

the battery charger port to the mounting bracket and

remove the battery charger port (DETAIL “A”)ꢀ

6ꢀ Remove the tie rods from the EXISTING suspension

armꢀ Refer to TIE ROD REPLACEMENT in this pro-

cedure of the manualꢀ

3ꢀ Remove the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts

thatsecurethewiringharnessw/bracket to the battery

box sub-frame (DETAIL “B”)ꢀ

7ꢀ Remove the side shroud assemblyꢀ Refer to RE-

PLACINGSIDESHROUDASSEMBLYinthisproce-

dure of the manualꢀ

4ꢀ Cut tie-wrap A, which secures the “Lego” block

connectors to the base frame (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

8ꢀ Removethegearboxfromthe EXISTINGsuspension

armꢀReferto REMOVING/INSTALLINGGEARBOX

in this procedure of the manualꢀ

5ꢀ Disconnect the “Lego” block connector of the bat-

tery wiring harness from the “Lego” block connec-

tor of the sensor cable assembly (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

9ꢀ Remove the locknut, two (2) spacers, two (2) wash-

ers and the mounting screw that secures the EXIST-

ING suspension arm to the base frameꢀ

6ꢀ Cut tie-wrap B, which secures the battery charger

cable and the RIGHT motor cable to the battery

box sub-frame (DETAIL “ D”)ꢀ

10ꢀ Remove EXISTING suspension arm from the base

frameꢀ

7ꢀ Disconnect the battery harness/charger cable

(BLUE) from the controller connector (BLUE)

(DETAIL”E”)ꢀ

11ꢀ Secure the NEW suspension arm to the base frame

using the mounting screw, two (2) washers, two (2)

spacers and the locknutꢀ Torque the locknuts to 85

-inch poundsꢀ

8ꢀ Remove the wiring harnessꢀ

12ꢀ Reassemble the wheelchair by reversing STEPS 1-8ꢀ

Installing

1ꢀ Connect the battery harness/charger cable (BLUE)

to the controller connector (BLUE) (DETAIL”E”)ꢀ

Locknut

2ꢀ Connectthe“Lego”blockconnectorofthebatterywir-

ing harness to the “Lego” block connector of the sen-

sor cable assembly (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

Washer

3ꢀ Securethe“Lego”blockconnectorstothebaseframe

with a NEW tie wrap (DETAIL “C”)ꢀ

Mounting

Screw

4ꢀ Install the two (2) mounting screws and locknuts that

secure the wiring harness w/bracket to the battery

box sub-frameꢀ Use Loctite 242 and torque mounting

screws to 160-inch pounds (DETAIL “B”)ꢀ

Base

Frame

5ꢀ SecurethebatterychargercableandtheRIGHTmo-

tor cable to the battery box sub-frame with a NEW tie

wrap (DETAIL “D”)ꢀ

Spacer

Suspension Arm

FIGURE 11 - REPLACING THE SUSPENSION ARM

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

6ꢀ Reinstall the mounting screw that secures the battery 7ꢀ ReinstallthebatteryboxesꢀRefertoINSTALLING/RE-

chargerporttothemountingbracket(DETAIL”A”)ꢀSe-

curelyTightenꢀ

MOVING GROUP 24 BATTERY BOXES in PRO-

CEDURE 9 of this manualꢀ

Mounting Screws

Wiring

Harness W/

Bracket

Mounting

Bracket

Battery

Box Sub-

Frame

Battery

Charger

Port

Locknuts

DETAIL “B”

Mounting

Screw

Base Frame

“Lego”

Block

Connector

Of The

Sensor

Cable

“Lego” Block

Connector

Of The

Battery

Wiring

Harness

DETAIL “A”

Tie Wrap B

Battery

Box Sub-

Frame

Tie Wrap A

DETAIL “C”

RIGHT

Motor

Cable

Battery Charger

Cable

DETAIL “D”

Controller

Connector

(Blue)

Battery

Harness/

Charger

Cable (Blue)

DETAIL “E”

FIGURE 12 - REMOVING/ INSTALLING WIRING HARNESS

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

Mounting Screws

ADJ USTING WEIGHT

DISTRIBUTION (FIGURE 13)

NOTE:Depending on the seat depth ordered, theposition

oftheseatsupportbracketsisfactorysetbetween 2ꢀ25 and

6 inches (measured from the front of the base frame to the

frontoftheseatsupportbrackets)ꢀThiswillputapproximately

65% of the total weight of the chair and user over the drive

wheels(largewheels), allowingforthebestperformanceof

thechairꢀ

Seat Support

Brackets

In order to achieve maximum comfort and maneuverability

for the end user, it may be necessary to adjust the seat

support brackets slightly forward or backwardꢀItisrecom-

mended that the seat support brackets be set as close to

2ꢀ25 - 6 inch mark (depending on seat depth) as possible,

while allowing maximum comfort and maneuverability to

the end userꢀ

Front Of

Base

Frame

2ꢀ25 Inches (For a

seat depth of 14 to

16 inches)

Adjusting Weight Distribution For New Seat

Depth

NOTE: Seat/seat frame not shown for clarityꢀ

FIGURE 13 - ADJUSTING WEIGHT

DISTRIBUTIO N

NOTE: When changing the seat depth of the chair, it is

necessary to adjust the seat support brackets in order to

achieve optimum weight distribution (65%)ꢀ Perform the

following procedure to adjust the seat brackets:

INSTALLING 90^oFOOTBOARD

(FIGURE 14)

1ꢀ Refer to the following chart to determine the correct

position ofthetwo(2)seatsupportbracketstoachieve

optimum weight distribution (65%)ꢀ

WARNING

DO NOT re m o ve d e te nt p in fro m fo o tre st

a sse m b ly. Othe rwise , injury m a y re sult.

Seat

Depth

(Inches)

Position Of The Seat Support

Brackets (Inches) To Achieve

Optimum Weight Distribution (65%)

1ꢀ RemovetheexistingfootrestsꢀReferto FRONTRIG-

GINGS in PROCEDURE 3 of the Owner’s manual,

part number 1081227ꢀ

14 to 16 inches

17 to 18 inches

19 to 20 inches

2ꢀ25-inches

4ꢀ25-inches

6-inches

2ꢀ RemovethetelescopingfrontriggingsupportsꢀRefer

to ADJUSTING/REPLACING TELESCOPING

FRONTRIGGINGSUPPORTinPROCEDURE3of

the Owner’s Manual, part number 1081227ꢀ

2ꢀ Loosen the four (4) mounting screws that secure the

two (2) seat support brackets to the base frameꢀ

3ꢀ RemoveexistingfrontandrearshroudsꢀRefertoRE-

MOVING/INSTALLING THE REAR SHROUD and

REMOVING/INSTALLINGTHEFRONTSHROUDin

this procedure of the Manualꢀ

3ꢀ Adjust the two (2) seat support brackets forward or

backward until the position determined in STEP 1 is

achievedꢀ

4ꢀ RemovetheseatꢀRefertoREMOVING/INSTALLING

THESEATFRAMEinPROCEDURE6ofthisManualꢀ

5ꢀ Positionthe90^ofootboardonthebaseframeasshown

NOTE: When the front of the seat aligns with the controller,

approximately65%ofthetotalweightofthechairanduseris

overthedrive wheels (largewheels)ꢀ

inFIGURE14ꢀ

4ꢀ Adjust the two (2) seat brackets slightly forward or

backward, until maximum comfort and maneuver-

ability for the end user is acheivedꢀ

6ꢀ Loosely install one (1) mounting screw into the back

of the footboard and into the base frameꢀ

5ꢀ Retighten the four (4) mounting screws securing the

two (2) seat support brackets to the base frameꢀ

7ꢀ Loosely install two (2) mounting screws and washers

throughthetopofthefootboardandintothebaseframeꢀ

8ꢀ Torque all three (3) mounting screw between 15 and

19-foot poundsꢀ

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PROCEDURE 17

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

9ꢀ Adjust angleoffootrestꢀRefertoFOOTRESTANGLE

ADJUSTMENTSinthisprocedureoftheManualꢀ

FOOTBOARD ADJ USTMENTS-

DEPTH/ HEIGHT/ ANGLE

(FIGURE 15)

10ꢀ Install the seatꢀ Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING

THESEATFRAMEinPROCEDURE6ofthismanualꢀ

WARNING

DO NOT re m o ve d e te nt p in fro m fo o tre st

a sse m b ly. Othe rwise , injury m a y re sult.

11ꢀ Install NEW front shroud and existing rear shroudꢀ

Refer to REMOVING/INSTALLING THE REAR

SHROUD and REMOVING/INSTALLING THE

FRONT SHROUD in this procedure of the Manualꢀ

Depth

12ꢀ Install the two (2) end caps provided into the ends of

theseatframewherethetelescopingfrontriggingsup-

ports were mountedꢀ

1ꢀ Remove the four (4) flat screws, washers and locknuts

that secure 90^ofootboard to the two (2) half clampsꢀ

NOTE: Observe the angle of the footboardfor reinstallationꢀ

13ꢀ Adjust footboardꢀ Refer to DEPTH/HEIGHT/ANGLE

ADJUSTMENT in this procedure of the manualꢀ

2ꢀ Move footboardtoone(1)oftwo(2)mountingpositionsꢀ

3ꢀ Secure the footboard to the half clamps with the four

(4)flatscrews,washersandlocknutsꢀSecurelytightenꢀ

Mounting

Screws

Mounting

Screw (STEP 6)

(STEP 7)

An gle

1ꢀ Loosen, but do not remove the four (4) flat screws,

washers and locknuts that secure the footplate to the

half clampsꢀ

2ꢀ Position the 90^ofootboard to the desired angleꢀ

Washer

90^oFootrest

Support

3ꢀ Retighten four (4) flat screws, washers and locknutsꢀ

90^o

Footboard

Heigh t

1ꢀ Remove the two (2) hub capsꢀ

2ꢀ Remove the mounting screw, washers, caplug

washers, and locknut that secure the footboard to

the footrest supportꢀ

3ꢀ Adjust footboard to desired heightꢀ

4ꢀ Secure the footboard with the mounting screw,

washers, caplug washers, and locknutꢀ Tighten

mounting screw and locknut to 12 foot poundsꢀ See

FIGURE 15 for hardware orientationꢀ

Flat Screws

Washers

Locknuts

FIGURE 14 - INSTALLING 90^oFOOTBOARD

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

DEPTH

FOOTREST ANGLE ADJ USTMENTS

Flat Screws

Washers

Locknuts

WARNING

DO NOT re m o ve d e te nt p in fro m fo o tre st

a sse m b ly. Othe rwise , injury m a y re sult.

Two (2)

Mounting

Positions

Footrest Angle Adjustm ent Relative to the

Vertical Position of the Front Shroud

(FIGURE 16)

Footboard

NOTE: The angle of the footrest relative to the vertical

positionofthefrontshroudcanbeincreasedordecreased

by adjusting both cams located at the top of the footrest

supportꢀ

ANG LE/ HEIG HT

Side View Of 90^oFootboard

1ꢀ Loosen the mounting screw and locknut that secure

the cams to the upper mounting bracketꢀ Refer to

DETAIL“A”ꢀ

Flat Screws

(Loosen

Here)

NOTE: Both cams MUST be rotated to the same posi-

tion to keep the footrest square to the baseꢀ

2ꢀ Rotate both cams either direction until footrest is at

desired angleꢀ Refer to DETAIL “B” and “C”

Washer/

Locknut

3ꢀ Tightenmountingscrewandlocknutto12footpoundsꢀ

Half Clamp

Flat Screws

Washers

Locknuts

Footrest Angle Adjustm ent Relative to the

Horizontal Position of the Front Shroud

(FIGURE 16)

NOTE: The footrest is factory set to be square to the base

when installedꢀ The footrest can be positioned to be out of

square by adjusting only one (1) of the cams located at the

top of the footrest supportꢀ

Washer

Footrest

Support

1ꢀ Loosenthemountingscrewandlocknutthatsecurethe

cams to the upper mounting bracketꢀ Refer to DETAIL

“A”ꢀ

Footboard

2ꢀ Perform one (1) of the following:

Hub Cap

NOTE: Right and Left are determined by sitting in the

wheelchairꢀ

Locknut

Aꢀ Turningtherightcamwillrotatethefootrestcounter-

clockwiseꢀ Refer to DETAIL “D”ꢀ

Caplug

Mounting Screw

Bꢀ Turning the left cam will rotate the footrest clock-

wiseꢀ Refer to DETAIL“D”ꢀ

FIGURE 15 - DEPTH/ HEIGHT/ ANGLE

ADJUSTMENT

3ꢀ When footrest is at desired position, tighten mounting

screw and locknut to 12 foot poundsꢀ

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FWD WHEELCHAIRS

PROCEDURE 17

DETAIL “A”

DETAIL “B”

Locknut

Upper

Cams

Cam

Mounting

Screw

Mounting

Bracket

DETAIL “C” - SIDE VIEW OF FOOTREST

NOTE: Angle is

increased or

decreaseddepending

on direction of footrest

rotation

Direction of

Footrest

Rotation

Vertical Position

of Front Shroud

DETAIL “D” - TOP VIEW OF FOOTREST

Left

Cam

Right

Cam

Horizontal Position

of Front Shroud

Footrest

COUNTER-

CLOCKWISE

Direction of

Footrest Rotation

FIGURE 16 - FOOTREST ANGLE ADJUSTMENTS

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTES

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

NOTES

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LIMTIED WARRANTY

LIMITED WARRANTY

PLEASE NOTE: THE WARRANTY BELOW HAS BEEN DRAFTED TO COMPLY WITH FEDERAL LAW

APPLICABLE TO PRODUCTS MANUFACTURED AFTER JULY 4, 1975.

This wa rra nty is e xte nd e d o nly to the o rig ina l p urc ha se r/ use r o f o ur p ro d uc ts.

This wa rra nty g ive s yo u sp e c ific le g a l rig hts a nd yo u m a y a lso ha ve o the r le g a l rig hts

whic h va ry fro m sta te to sta te .

Inva c a re wa rra nts se a t fra m e to b e fre e fro m d e fe c ts in m a te ria ls a nd wo rkm a nship

fo r a p e rio d o f thre e (3) ye a rs fro m d a te o f p urc ha se ; tha t e le c tric a l c o m p o ne nts a re

wa rra nte d fo r a p e rio d o f o ne (1) ye a r; g e a rb o x/ m o to rs fo r a p e rio d o f 18 m o nths; a nd

g e a rle ss/ b rushle ss m o to rs fo r five (5) ye a rs fro m the d a te o f p urc ha se ; a nd the b a se

fra m e for the life of the p rod uc t; a ll re m a ining c om p one nts (inc lud ing g a s c ylind e rs a nd

m otor loc k p a d s) for one (1) ye a r from the d a te of p urc ha se e xc e p t up holste re d m a te -

ria ls, p a d d e d m a te ria ls a nd tire s/ whe e ls. If within suc h wa rra nty p e rio d a ny suc h p ro d -

uc t sha ll b e p ro ve n to b e d e fe c tive , suc h p ro d uc t sha ll b e re p a ire d o r re p la c e d , a t

Inva c a re 's o p tio n. This wa rra nty d o e s no t inc lud e a ny la b o r o r ship p ing c ha rg e s in-

c urre d in re p la c e m e nt p a rt insta lla tio n o r re p a ir o f a ny suc h p ro d uc t. Inva c a re 's so le

ob lig a tion a nd your e xc lusive re m e d y und e r this wa rra nty sha ll b e lim ite d to suc h re p a ir

a nd / o r re p la c e m e nt.

This wa rra nty p e rta ins to Arro w Se rie s, Ra ng e r X Se rie s a nd To rq ue Se rie s Only!

Fo r wa rra nty se rvic e , p le a se c o nta c t the d e a le r fro m who m yo u p urc ha se d yo ur In-

va c a re p ro d uc t. In the e ve nt yo u d o no t re c e ive sa tisfa c to ry wa rra nty se rvic e , p le a se

write d ire c tly to Inva c a re a t the a d d re ss a t the b o tto m o f the b a c k c o ve r. Pro vid e

d e a le r’s na m e , a d d re ss, d a te o f p urc ha se , ind ic a te na ture o f the d e fe c t a nd , if the

p ro d uc t is se ria lize d , ind ic a te the se ria l num b e r. Do no t re turn p ro d uc ts to o ur fa c to ry

witho ut o ur p rio r c o nse nt.

LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS: THE FOREGOING WARRANTY SHALL NOT APPLY TO SERIAL

NUMBERED PRODUCTS IF THE SERIAL NUMBER HAS BEEN REMOVED OR DEFACED, PROD-

UCTS SUBJECTED TO NEGLIGENCE, ACCIDENT, IMPROPER OPERATION, MAINTENANCE OR

STORAGE, COMMERCIAL OR INSTITUTIONAL USE, PRODUCTS MODIFIED WITHOUT

INVACARE'S EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, MODIFICA-

TION THROUGH THE USE OF UNAUTHORIZED PARTS OR ATTACHMENTS; PRODUCTS DAM-

AGED BY REASON OF REPAIRS MADE TO ANY COMPONENT WITHOUT THE SPECIFIC CON-

SENT OF INVACARE, OR TO A PRODUCT DAMAGED BY CIRCUMSTANCES BEYOND

INVACARE'S CONTROL, AND SUCH EVALUATION WILL BE SOLELY DETERMINED BY INVAC-

ARE. THE WARRANTY SHALL NOT APPLY TO PROBLEMS ARISING FROM NORMAL WEAR OR

FAILURE TO ADHERE TO THESE INSTRUCTIONS.

THE FOREGOING WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRAN-

TIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IF ANY, INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-

ABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL NOT EXTEND BEYOND THE DURA-

TION OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY PROVIDED HEREIN AND THE REMEDY FOR VIOLATIONS OF

ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY SHALL BE LIMITED TO REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF THE DEFEC-

TIVE PRODUCT PURSUANT TO THE TERMS CONTAINED HEREIN. INVACARE SHALL NOT BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER.

THIS WARRANTY SHALL BE EXTENDED TO COMPLY WITH STATE/ PROVINCIAL LAWS AND RE-

Q UIREMENTS.

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Inva c a re Corpora tion

www.invacare.com

U S A

Canada

Invacare,Storm Series,and Arroware registered trademarksof

Invacare Corporation.

OneInvacareWay

Elyria , Ohio USA

44036-2125

5970ChedworthWay

Mississauga,Ontario

L5R3T9,Canada

905-890-8838

Yes,Youcan.,RangerX, and Torque are trademarksof

Invacare Corporation.

800-333-6900

Loctite isa registered tra dema rkofLoctite Corpora tion.

2001Invacare Corporation

Form No. 98-266 Pa rtNo. 1081229 RevC (1)-4/01

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Indesit Cooktop KD6C0E User Manual
IOGear Computer Hardware GPEN200N User Manual
IOGear Switch GUH274W3 User Manual
JAI Security Camera CV M77 User Manual
JVC CRT Television 0805JGI II IM User Manual
JVC Security Camera VN H137U User Manual
Kidde Smoke Alarm 1276CA User Manual
King Canada Grinder KC 1090 User Manual
Kodak Digital Camera CX4230 User Manual
Konica Minolta Digital Camera Revio KD 3300 User Manual